Home

samsung CLX-8540ND Series Multi Functional Printer user manual

1. Make sure you load one sheet at a time and hold the paper with two hands for the paper not to fall since the paper length is longer than the multi tray length lt Loading originals and print media gt 4 Squeeze the multi purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper Do not force too much or the paper will be bent which will result in a paper jam or skew After loading paper set the paper type and size for the multi purpose tray See page 4 9 for copying and faxing or the Software section for PC printing Note The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on the control panel After printing fold the multi purpose tray extension and close the multi purpose tray Setting the paper size and type After loading paper in the paper tray you need to set the paper size and type These settings will apply to Copy and Fax modes For PC printing you need to select the paper size and type in the application program you use on your PC See Software section 1 2 3 Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 6 Press the General tab Press the down arrow to switch the screen press Tray Management Select tray and its options such as paper size and type Press OK Note If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing pape
2. Store Poll iron Perrot Deir Poll Fror Delete Perle 5 Press the input area then the pop up keyboard enter Passcode The four digit number which you have to inform the receiver If you do not want to set Passcode enter number 0000 here Then you can store delete print and receive a fax for polling without any passcode Note If you want to use the Mailbox refer to Storing the originals in the Mailbox Page 6 10 6 Select the Delete On Poll option If you select Off the sent fax data will be remained in the machine s memory even after it s printing If you select On the fax data will be deleted at the printing point 7 Press OK to start to store the originals into memory for polling 8 Give the passcode to the receiver Printing Deleting the polling document 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Press the Advanced tab gt Polling gt Print or Delete 3 Enter Passcode 4 Press OK Polling a remote fax This option allows you to retrieve poll a fax which is stored in the remote machine 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Press the Advanced tab gt Polling gt Poll from Remote CF Heady to Fax ME Group Nama cannot be empty Store Pol iron Fenota Delay Send Priogity Send Dekt Pol Front Le Dedete Perwa Pelling Mailt Primi Bark Note Your can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll the fax at a specific time within 24 hours 3 Enter Passcode and destination fax number using the number k
3. Scan the originals and send it right away e Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using E mail SMB FTP or Networks scanning e Simply use the touch screen keyboard to enter email addresses and send the scanned image immediately e Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG TIFF and PDF formats Set a specific time to transmit a Fax Optional e You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also send the fax to several stored destinations e After the transmission the machine may print out the fax reports according to the setting 1 1 lt Introduction gt Use USB flash memory devices If you have a USB memory device you can use it in various ways with your machine e You can scan documents and save them to the device e You can directly print data stored to the device e You can back up data and restore backup files to the machine s memory This machine supports IPv6 Machine features The table below lists a general overview of features supported by your machine Included O Optional ee ee USB 2 0 USB Memory PostScript Emulation DADF Duplex Automatic Document Feeder Hard Disk Fax option kit Optional tray 2 3 High Capacity Feeder Stand Stacker amp Stapler Finisher Staple Cartridge FDI Foreign Device Interface kit oo SmarThru Workflow Network Interface Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX Duplex printing 4 Bin Ma
4. Switches to ports configuration Shows the port type device connected to the port and status m Selected port Port type USB Device Port is unused Exit CTI B 2 2 e Refresh Renews the available ports list e Release port Releases the selected port Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the parallel port or USB port Since the MFP device contains more than one device printer and scanner it is necessary to organize proper access of consumer applications to these devices via the single I O port The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers The drivers address their devices via so called MFP ports The current status of any MFP port can be viewed via the Ports Configuration The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP device while another block is in use When you install a new MFP device onto your system it is strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver Configurator In this case you will be asked to choose 1 0 port for the new device This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for MFP s functionality For MFP scanners I O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers automatically so proper settings are applied by default Configuring
5. 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Select the tray in Paper Supply 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Booklet 5 7 lt Copying gt 5 Press On to activate this feature and select detailed settings for each option e 1 Sided Original Copys on one side of the paper e 2 Sided Original Copys on both sides of the paper 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Note This feature is possible only with A4 Letter Legal Folio Oficio JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 and Statement sized paper Cover copying The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken from a different tray Covers must be the same size and orientation as the main body of the job 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Select the tray in Paper Supply 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Covers Note Once you have set the Paper Supply option to Auto you cannot use this feature 5 Press On to use this feature and select detailed settings for each option e Position Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front back or both e Cover Sheet Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided 2 sided or blank paper e Paper Source Select the paper tray where the cover sheet is loaded 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Transparency copying
6. Clear the jam Page 12 3 and page 12 5 Clear the jam Page 12 3 and page 12 5 Message Paper Jam in tray 3 Paper jam inside finisher Paper jam inside finisher duplex Paper Jam inside of duplex path Paper Jam inside of machine Prepare new xxx toner cartridge Meaning Suggested solutions Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray Paper jammed in the stacker Paper jammed in the stacker Paper has jammed during duplex printing Paper has jammed in the registration area Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge the estimated cartridge life of toner is close Clear the jam Page 12 3 and page 12 5 Open the stacker door and remove jammed paper by lowering guide 1a or 1b Open the stacker door and remove jammed paper by lowering guide 1a or 1b Clear the jam Page 12 9 Clear the jam Page 12 8 Prepare a new cartridge for a replacement You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner Page 11 3 12 13 lt Troubleshooting gt Message Meaning Suggested solutions Replace with new xxx toner cartridge A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life Note e If the black toner cartridge is reached its estimated cartridge life Mono Only message does not appear e Samsung does not recommend using non genuine Samsung toner cartridge such a
7. Pentium III 933 MHz 128 MB Windows AE Ween IV TGH 256 MB Windows Pentium III 933 MHz 128 MB Server 2003 Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB Windows Pentinum IV 1 GHz 512 MB Server 2008 Pentinum IV 2 GHz 2048 MB Free disk space 600 MB drivers 1 5 GB PCL 6 1 25 GB to 2 GB Print quality option 10 GB Poster printing 15 GB Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 1 GB 2 16 GB bit or 64 bit processor or higher Windows 7 e Supports DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme e DVD R W Drive Pentium IV 1 GHz Windows x86 or 1 4 GHz x64 Server 2008 R2 processors 2 GHz or faster Multiple pages per sheet N up Q wy Fit to page printing Scale printing Watermark Note e Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems e Users who have an administrator right can install the software e Windows Terminal Service is compatible with this machine X O 2 4 X X Overlay X Duplex Store Print Delay Print X Spool Print X Proof Print Stapler oega Different X source for first page o x x ooe x x X a This feature is not supported MAC OS X 10 3 b The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper 2 2 lt Software overview gt Macintosh Requirement recommended Operating system CPU Intel Processor e 128 MB fora Power PC G4 G5 Power PC
8. e Original 100 Prints texts or images the same size as originals e Auto Fit Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the output paper e Other preset values Allows you to easily select commonly used values Note The Custom option is different depending on where the originals is placed In the DADF 25 200 adjustment is possible And in the scanner glass 25 400 adjustment is possible Copying on both sides of originals Duplex Press the Basic tab gt Duplex then use left right arrows to select Duplex value Note If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides of original the message Another Page appears after the first page copied At this time load the original s the other side facing down and press Yes then the machine starts scanning the second page of your original Press more to see the detail values e 1 gt 1 Sided Scans one side of an original and prints on one side of the paper this function produces exactly the same print out from originals E 1 gt 2 Sided Scans one side of originals and prints them on both sides of the paper EHF lt Copying gt e 1 gt 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 Scans one side of the originals and e Reverse 2 gt 2 Sided Scans the both sides of originals and prints prints on both sides of the paper but the information on the back them on both sides of a paper But the machine reverses the print side of the pri
9. 12 Turn the imaging unit locking levers inwards until it locks in place and close the inner cover 13 Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place 14 Close the front cover then the side cover 15 Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on Caution v If the cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate 11 7 lt Maintenance gt z 4 Push the lock lever up and pull the waste toner container out Replacing the waste toner container The life of the waste toner container unit is approximately 48 000 images printing When the life span of the waste toner container has expired Waste tank is full Replace it appears on the screen display of the control panel indicating the waste toner container needs to be replaced Otherwise your printer stops printing To replace the waste toner container 1 Turn the machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool 2 Open the side cover Note When you pull out the waste toner container out of the machine move the container carefully not to drop it from your hands Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner does not spill 5 Remove the container s cap from the container as shown below and use it to close the waste toner container openings 3 Open the front cover Caution K Do no
10. Install a Samsung genuine toner cartridge designed for your machine Try to reinstall the toner cartridge Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service e Remove the sealing tape from the imaging unit Thoroughly roll the toner cartridge five or six times and reinstall it Turn the machine off and turn it on again Check the toner cartridge and redistribute the toner Page 11 3 If the problem still persists please call for service Replace the imaging unit Replace the toner cartridge with a Samsung genuine toner cartridge Page 11 4 Delete the received fax data in the memory Call for service to delete fax memory Delete the received fax data in the memory to secure memory Call for service Message Finisher door is open Close it Finisher error zzz Please turn off then on Fuser error zzz Please turn off then on Fuser unit is not installed correctly Install it LSU error zzz Please turn off then on Motor does not operate zzz Please turn off then on Original paper does not feed in scanner Original paper is too long for scanner Check size Original paper jam in front of scanner The finisher cover is not securely latched There is a problem in the finisher unit There is a problem in the fuser unit working The fuser unit is not installed or correctly There is a problem in
11. Note If this option is grayed out select following options in the Basic tab to activate it Duplex to 1 gt 1 Sided Reduce Enlarge to Original 100 Paper Supply to Tray 5 Press On to activate this feature 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Book copying Use this feature to copy a book If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 18 inches start copying with the scanner lid open 1 Place the originals face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 Note The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Press the Advanced tab gt Book Copy Note To remove shadows of a book edge press the Image tab gt Erase Edge gt Book Center and Edge Erase 4 Select the binding option e Off Disables this feature e Left Page Prints left page of the book e Right Page Prints right page of the book e Both Page Prints both facing pages of the book 5 Press OK 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Booklet copying The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper which are then folded to produce a booklet with all of the pages in the correct sequence The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each image to fit on the selected paper 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1
12. Primes AMac OS 10 5 eOutput Mode This option allows you to choose the way printouts are to be arranged You need to install an optional finisher such as 2 Bin Finisher or 4 Bin Mailbox eOutput Bin This option allows you to choose the output bin for prinouts You need to install an optional finisher such as 2 Bin Finisher or 4 Bin Mailbox eStaple This option staples the print outs Request Offset If you don t want the printout sets to be in one stack the machine places printout sets slightly offset from one another Front Cover Printer H a Pracerc Standard E Copies i B i t Collated Two Sided Pages Aull Fram 1 toe l aper Sire Us Letter red 6 50 by 1100 inthe rh ntation il i Printer Features HH Feature Sets Front Cover RE Front Cover Option Mo Covers i Lot Froet Cover Source Hone w Froot Cover Type None a Cire p Cn GA AMac OS 10 5 eFront Cover Option Allows you to choose the option for printing a front cover page You can choose to print the front cover blank preprinted 1 sided printed or 2 sided printed eFront Cover Source Allows you to choose the paper source for the front cover Front Cover Type Allows you to choose the paper type for the front cover Back Cover Printer ad fa Precete Standard rz Copies LS M Collated C Two Sided Fages fel full 3 Fram 1 to l Paper Size US Letter E 650 by 1100 inches Grientation 1 F
13. Copy Setup Tore oe Protocol B02 1x Fax Setup 3 i Network Setup Ethernet Speed P6 Authentication Cier Setting e a TCP IP Protocol Select appropriate protocol and configure parameters to use the network environment Note There are lots of parameters to be set therefore if you are not sure leave as it is or consult the network administrator Ethernet Speed You can select the communication speed for Ethernet connections Clear Setting Reverts the network settings to the default values You can select the user authentication for network communication For details information consult the network administrator 10 6 lt Machine status and advanced setup gt E oe rr Machine supports IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements IPv6 Activate When you select On the Host Name and Link Local Address will automatically be entered into the address field DHCPv6 Configuration If you have a DHCPV6 server on your network you can set one of the option for default dynamic host configuration e Routers Use DHCPV6 only when requested by a router e DHCPv6 Addresses Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request e DHCPv6 Off Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request Authentication This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data or change the password 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up
14. The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition WARNING Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser Scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes When using this product these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons CAUTION CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM DANGER LASER RADIATION AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM DANGER RADIATIONS INVISIBLES DU LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EVITER TOUTE EXPOSITION DIRECTE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCI N RADIACI N LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABFE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO PERIGO RADIA O LASER INVIS VEL AO ABRIR EVITE EXPOSI O DIRECTA AO FEIXE GEVAAR ONZICHTBARE LASERSTRALEN BIJ GEOPENDE KLEP DEZE KLEP NIE
15. When you prepare transparencies for presentations use this feature to copy the information Note Before you start this special copy job set the tray s Paper Types and Paper Size to Transparency Page 4 9 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 Load the right sized transparencies into the tray you have set Set the paper type to Transparency Press Copy from the Main screen oa fF W N Press the Advanced tab gt Transparencies 6 Select Transparencies option e No Separator Does not place separator sheets between transparencies e Black Sheet Places a blank sheet between transparencies e Printed Sheet Places the same image on the divider sheets as printed on the transparency 7 Select media sources in case you selected either Black Sheet or Printed Sheet Press OK 9 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Watermark copying You can copy the original with a watermark For example you can use it when you want to have large gray letters such as Top Secret or Confidential printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of the copy y Py 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt WaterMark a A OQ N Select WaterMark opti
16. A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a client server networking protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting generally information required by the client host to participate on an IP network DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module DIMM a small circuit board that holds memory DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data received fax data DNS The Domain Name Server DNS is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks such as the Internet Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact striking an ink soaked cloth ribbon against the paper much like a typewriter DPI Dots Per Inch DPI is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing Generally higher DPI results in a higher resolution more visible detail in the image and a larger file size DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers Duplex A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print or scan on both sides of the paper A printer equip
17. Documents Box Basic tab Page 5 1 Basic tab Page 6 2 User Box tab Page 11 2 Original Size Address Book Add Reduce Enlarge Duplex Delete Duplex Resolution Edit Output Advanced tab Page 6 2 Detail Original Type Original Size Search Color Mode Delay Send Enter Darkness Priority Send System Box tab Paper Supply Polling Page 11 2 Advanced tab Page 5 1 Mailbox Detail ID Copy Image tab Page 6 3 Enter N Up Original Type Poster Copy Darkness Clone Copy Erase Background Book Copy Color Mode Booklet Covers Transparencies WaterMark Overlay AutoCrop Multi Bin Image tab Page 5 2 Erase Edge Erase Background Margin Shift Scan Enhance Adjust Backside Image USB Optional Scan to Email Scan to Server Page 9 1 Page 10 2 Page 10 2 USB Format From tab Basic tab USB Print To tab Advanced tab Scan to USB Cc tab Image tab Basic tab Bcc tab Output tab Advanced tab Subject tab Image tab Message tab Output tab Options tab Scan to PC Scan to USB Machine Status Page 10 2 Page 10 2 Page 10 1 Basic tab Basic tab Supplies Life tab Advanced tab Advanced tab Machine Info tab Image tab Image tab Output tab Output tab 1 8 lt Introduction gt Machine Setup button When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel the screen displays four menus Machine Status shows the supplies life billing counters and reports Admin Setting lets you set the advanced setup to use your machine in depth a
18. GUNG janes tununseeanvetuasitorausi se tbaesennbieeiutereyiiaay eee EATE 29 USING SMarINrU OMICS sisuixsriovtacmciiienteslebniatiomtnend titanic ans EEEE RS 29 Seale So ilar Nl AOO a4sancavnnay synepayueanemanauerasurenseecnauatauataaua E TET areata 30 Scanning Process with TWAIN enabled Software cccccccccc eee eee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesganeeeesgennenes 30 2 Scanning Using the WIA DVN OF aa cterenana seed peuwbpeseacla Prins en eiia EnA ANNEE ETENEE roe eee E NOAS 31 Windows XP Server 2003 oiccec cece ccc cce cece cceecceeceueceueenneeneeeneteueeeueennteneenneenneenuteneteneeaneennenngs 31 Windows 2O0G VIST pasira fu anacensa danas a nae neces ana ts AEE neaseneus 31 WINGOWS 7 gaccuancnueccvatosuaacsua aetna seawendesudwotetesuaciiba cases REE EOE 31 Chapter 8 USING SMART PANEL Understanding SMart Rane eer tee eee ene er en ene een a ene er ene ee eee 32 Opening the Troubleshooting Guide cccccccec cece eee ee eee ee eee eeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeesganeeteegganeeeeesggngs 33 Changing the Smart Panel Program SettingS ccc cccccc cess e cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeesesaeeeeesgnnnees 33 Chapter 9 USING YOUR PRINTER IN LINUX Chapter 10 SOU SLES aa A dae ound counties seaani inst oourauee niinasesnepanesa tana E E S 34 installing the Unified LINUX DIVET scicsavessanicrunsarawecssraaieeorsieednrodiwed ae avirermmarnurestinerereawirerutsaeues 34 Installing the Unified LINUX Driver
19. Optional e Machine Status Enters Machine Status menu which shows the wa Copy bob tobAanne_o Scanning bobne Topy current status of the machine on Cony Job Job Nanne_1 Scanning Jobin 1 Copy e Admin Setting Enters Admin Setting menu which allows an 002 Copy JobJobName_2 Scanning JobOwmer 2 Copy administrator to set up the machine 003 Copy Job JobNamne_3 Scanning _JobOvner 3 Co Tray Management Enters Tray Management menu which soil Aiiki isisi Pca ay shows the currently installed tray and their status You can also aeaa iria ois on E ibai ianei ec change the paper settings for each tray v2 Total 0 e Usage Page Report You can see the report on the amount of printouts depending on the type e Toner Info Shows amount of toner used e Current Job tab Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending e Completed Job tab Provides the list of completed jobs e Active Notice tab Displays any error codes that have occurred e LCD Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen e No Gives the order of jobs v You can change the display language e Job Name Shows job information like name and type Guides you to remove the USB memory devices from the e Status Gives the current status of each job machine Follow the instruction on the LCD This icon appears only e User Provides user name mainly computer name when you connect an USB memory module e Job Type Displays details
20. US Folio A4 JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 Statement Letter Legal US Folio A4 JIS B5 Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 163 g m lt 24 to 43 Ib bond for the tray1 ISO B5 Executive 120 to 220 g m 24 to 58 Ib A5 Statement Post bond for the multi purpose Card 4x6 tray Letter Legal US 90 to 120 g m 24 to 32 Ib Folio A4 JIS B5 bond for the tray1 ISO B5 Executive 90 to 120 g m 24 to 32 Ib A5 Statement Post bond for the multi purpose Card 4x6 tray 90 105 g m 24 to 28 Ib bond for high capacity feeder Card stock Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Thick paper Minimum size custom 216 x 1200 mm 8 5 x 47 24 inches a Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight thickness and environmental conditions b High capacity feeder does not support A6 c We recommend using Card stock that is less than 0 23mm thick Maximum size custom 98 x 148 mm 3 86 x 5 83 inches 60 to 220 g m 16 to 58 Ib bond Capacity 500 sheets of 80 g m4 20 Ib 75 g m bond 520 sheets paper in the tray1 100 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib bond in the multi purpose tray 1 950 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib 75 g m bond 2 100 sheets in the high capacity feeder 50 sheets of 80 g m lt 20 Ib paper in the tray1 10 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib in the multi purpose tray 100 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib paper in the tray1 20 sheets of 80 g m2 20 Ib
21. Windows 15 26 printer software install Macintosh 42 Windows 5 uninstall Macintosh 42 Windows 12 printing booklets 22 double sided 23 from Linux 38 R resolution printing 39 S scanning Linux 39 SmarThru 29 TWAIN 30 WIA driver 31 scanning from Macintosh 49 setting darkness 18 image mode 18 true type option 18 software install Macintosh 42 Windows 5 reinstall Windows 11 system requirements Macintosh 42 uninstall Macintosh 42 Windows 12 status monitor use 32 T TWAIN scan 30 U uninstall software Macintosh 42 Windows 12 uninstalling MFP driver Linux 35 W watermark create 24 delete 24 edit 24 print 24 WIA scan 31 51
22. based Mac 512 MB Mac OS X 10 4 or lower e 512 MB fora Intel based Mac 1 GB Intel Processor 512 MB 1 GB 1 GB Mac OS X 10 5 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4 G5 Mac OS X 10 6 Intel Processor 1 GB 2 GB Linux Item Requirement recommended Operating system RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4 5 32 64bit Fedora Core 2 9 32 64bit SUSE Linux 9 1 32bit SuSE Linux 9 2 9 3 10 0 10 1 10 2 10 3 11 0 11 1 32 64bit Mandrake 10 0 10 1 82 64bit Mandriva 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 32 64bit Ubuntu 6 06 6 10 7 04 7 10 8 04 8 10 32 64bit SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9 10 32 64bit Debian 3 1 4 0 5 0 82 64bit CPU Pentium IV 2 4GHz IntelCore2 free HDD space 1 GB 2 GB Note e It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for working with large scanned images e The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at maximum 2 3 lt Software overview gt 3 Getting Started This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the machine This chapter includes Setting up the hardware Setting up the network Installing the software Using the SetiIP program Altitude adjustment Machine s basic settings Understanding the keyboard Setting up the hardware This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in Quick Install Guide Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and complete following steps 1
23. components to install 9 The message which warns all application will close on your computer appears Click Continue ON QURA U N FF 42 10 After the installation is finished click Quit NOTE e If you have installed scan driver click Restart e After the installation is finished see Setting Up the Printer on page 43 Uninstalling software Uninstall is required if you are upgrading the software or if installation fails l Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer Turn on your computer and printer Insert the CD ROM which came with your printer into the CD ROM drive Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop Double click the MAC_ Installer folder Double click the Installer OS X icon Enter the password and click OK The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue Select Uninstall and click Uninstall The message which warns all application will close on your computer appears Click Continue 10 When the uninstallation is done click Quit WOON OUR WU N Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Setting Up the Printer Set up for your printer will be different depending on which cable you use to connect the printer to your computer the network cable or the USB cable For a Network connected NoTE Some printers do not support a network interface Before connecting your printer make sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to
24. l Start Windows Connect Device am 2 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs cance not find a connected device Check connection between your computer and gt Samsun g Printers gt your p rinter driver name gt Maintenance 3 Select Remove and click Next You will see a component list so that you can remove any item individually 4 Select the components you want to remove and then click Next 5 When your computer asks you to confirm your selection click Yes Cancel The selected driver and all of its components are removed from your computer e After connecting the printer click Next After the software is removed click Finish e If you don t want to connect the printer at this time click Next and No on the following screen Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation e The reinstallation window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use Please refer to the following connection method 1 Connect the device to your computer 2 Tum on the power of the device 3 If New Hardware Wizard is appeared close it 4 Click Next 5 Select the components you want to reinstall and click Next If you installed the printer software for local printing and you select your printer driver name the window asking you to print a test page appears Do as follows a To print a
25. press f to go to the Main screen lypi Eiai Saar CHATH Late Ide r _ First First 20 Ty A Fia Ti Serond Second 2720s 2 Third Third 27 2008 7 i Fourth Fourth 27 10 2008 2 m Fifth Fifth 22008 za T Siah Siah 27 11 2008 30 7 Total 10 Brees Frer Space 627 MBS Total 000 GR aua Search e User Box tab Create the box where you can save the document such as the file you have printed sent by email or scanned When you create a box you can set the password to secure your box The box with a password is called Secured Box and without it it is called public box e System Box tab The machine provided default boxes which you cannot modify them e Type Shows the box is secured or not e Box Name Shows the box name e Owner Shows the user name of a box e Date Shows the date of a box created e File Shows the number of total files in the box e Add Lets you add more boxes e Delete Deletes the selected box e Edit Lets you to modify a box name and an owner name e Detail Shows box information e Search Searches a box with a box name or an owner name e Enter Prints or sends the stored file in the box Cleaning your machine To maintain print and scan quality follow the cleaning procedures below each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality problems occur Caution tv e Cleaning the machine cabinet with cleaning materials that contain large am
26. then enter password and press OK Press the Setup tab gt Authentication Qe General Copy Setup Aathenication Mode Fax Setup Network Setup Change Admin Password Authentication Optional Service v E a Authentication No It disables Authentication Mode Mode Authentication Mode Network It enables the authentication mode which is set from the Job Account menu in the SyncThru Web Admin Service Accounting Standard You can set the local account for a Accounting certain user If the user with that account performs the printing job the machine counts it ee Authentication Foreign Device When you install the optional FDI Mode Interface kit select On to activate it continue Job Timer If there is not enough credit you can set the machine to cancel a job right away or wait a designated amount of time for a deposit Print Job Control When it is enabled the both computer printing and copying are possible since the credit remains With Disable copy printing needs the credit However when printing a report or a fax the credit is not needed Inhibit Services When no credit is left the machine disables the copy job only with Copy Only With All Service scanning service and copy job are disabled Internal Credits It is used when you cancel the job or when the job is cancelled by the device due to insufficient credits coin or is canceled by user
27. Changing the size of originals Press the Basic tab gt Original Size then use left right arrows to set the Original size Press more to see the detail values 7 Ready To Copy T Coping Orignal Sine Custom 48 3 E 7 e Custom Selects the scanning area of the original Press the cardinal point arrows to set the size e Auto DADF only Automatically detects the size of originals but this option supports only when originals are Legal Letter or A5 sized If the originals is mixed sized then the machine detects the largest original size and select the largest sized paper in the tray e Mixed Size Letter amp Legal DADF only Allows for the use of both of Letter and Legal sized papers together and the machine uses the proper sized paper from several trays For example if the originals are total 3 pages 1st page is the letter sized paper 2nd page is the legal sized paper and 3rd page is the letter sized paper then the machine prints the output first letter legal and letter in order from several trays e Other preset values Allows user to easily select commonly used values Reducing or enlarging copies Press the Basic tab gt Reduce Enlarge then use left right arrows to reduce or enlarge an image on the paper Press more to see the values 7 Ready To Cony Canti adic Erian Origanall 100 LiGL AAS Cito l E AAS 2e 4 25 100 poe LGL A TRTE Ada TRIS I wr OK l Cancel
28. D x H Weight 71 5 Kg 157 63 Ibs including consumables Package weight Paper 9 7 Kg 21 38 lbs Plastic 2 7 Kg 5 95 lbs Fusing 175 C 347 F temperature a b O gt o a DADF Duplex Automatic Document Feeder The machine with this feature scans both sides of a paper Sound Pressure Level ISO 7779 Configuration tested machine basic installation A4 paper simplex printing May be affected by operating environment printing interval media type and media size It varies depending on the product configuration Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798 Image counts are based on one color on each page If you print documents in full color Yellow Magenta Cyan Black the image count will be added by 4 images 15 2 lt Specifications gt Printer specifications o o es Printing method Color Laser Beam Printing Printing speed Up to 38 ppm in A4 40 ppm in Letter Duplex printing soeed Up to 33 ppm in A4 35 ppm in Letter First print out time Black amp White e From ready Less than 14 seconds e From coldboot Less than 85 seconds Color e From ready Less than 14 seconds e From coldboot Less than 85 seconds Print resolution Up to 9 600 x 600 dpi effective output 600 x 600 x 4 dpi Printer language PCL5ce PCL6 PostScript 3 PDF Direct V1 4 OS compatibility e Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 Vista 7 2008 R2 e Various Linux OS e Mac OS X
29. DADF 1 Open the scanner lid 2 Open the DADF cover 2 Grasp the misfed paper and remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands 3 Open the document input tray upwards and pull the document gently out of the DADF 1 scanner lid if you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to step 3 yA 4 TA 3 Open the white document background ESA Y DKS A p rail e GSIS 8 gt ag 3 e Lx m N4 A AOL 4 Close the DADF cover and the document input tray Then place the documents back in the DADF 12 2 lt Troubleshooting gt 4 Remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling Clearing paper jams When a paper jam occurs the warming message appears on the display screen Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam Message Location of jam Goto Paper Jam in tray 1 In the paper feed area Page 12 3 Paper Jam in tray2 tray eee va Page 12 5 Paper Jam in tray 2 HCF 0 Multi purpose tray Page 12 6 Paper Jam in tray3 Page 12 7 Paper Jam in MP tray Paper Jam in exit area In the fuser area Page 12 8 Paper Jam inside of machine In the paper inside the Page 12 8 machine Paper Jam at the bottom of In the duplex unit Page 12 9 duplex path 5 Close the white document background and the scanner lid Then Paper Jam at the top of load the removed pages back into the DADF duplex
30. E A E sist sonacieseatean sae ttateeiseeeeenioen ceetenecaeserins 7 10 CUS eS pee eee cine cope asec ct sesceieserees E E ecu oels ee tases E 7 10 PEE OAT nee ee E E ee ee eee ne eee eee eee Cee ee nee ee 7 11 Basic printing PNU OOC UNEN nent eeeat ire tee mms teres E E ee et eee eee 8 1 NICS IMOPAM OLIN ODs e a a E 8 1 Using USB flash memory POUT NS AUC seat tescs EE E E EE co ciesecenac teccsteeeneteaceteesueseoteeesetce 9 1 Understanding the USB SCr Cent ce ccccesasennehanetierececedsedechassodadeeiqcbadeeeaenaniacdedascotedsecasebebednessocadeitlsesGandassencbacch tenadedsae 9 1 Plugging man USB Memory GEVICE sossar a R E ae E aT 9 1 Scanning to an USB memory devi cciccvzesccsssecnuixceeretesnecensadecsesucietantacvetdecacad eseeestaeshieiwatecasteedeiendedeonedecseteseeieenerewes 9 2 OO UTI e E E E E E A TE PE E EAE E EEE E E E E E E 9 2 Seck 6 0 Ss e E A P eee AE ee E A A E ee E ee 9 2 BAC TA e E ee E E eee eee eee ee 9 2 PRN CINCO CNIS peee E E E E E A E 9 2 MoE aE e B E EE A A ENE EE E mr ar E E PEE E E A fee E E A E eer 9 3 JUU D eee E E E 9 3 Changing the scan feature Settings cccccccccssesessececeeeeceeeeeeeesesseeceeeeeeeessseeeeaeuceeeeeeeeessesasaeeeseeeeeeeeeessesaaaaaeeeseeeeness 9 3 PS oeie e E E A E a a a a S 9 3 RESOU oeoa E O E E E E E E 9 3 ONION Gl SIZE sesa E E E E E EE 9 3 Qngnal TYDE sesepi iE E E E OSEE EARE E E EE E E SSA REEERE 9 4 610 0 ad 016 ena a ee eee eee ee 9 4 HU TMS SS ohana cit E E nei
31. Enter Search Root Directory the top search level of the LDAP directory tree Select Authentication method Two options for LDAP server login Anonymous This is used to bind with null password and login ID Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS Simple This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN for adding Base DN to login name Select Match User s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute options are CN UID or UserPrincipalName 10 11 12 13 Enter your login name password maximum number of search results and search timeout Note LDAP Referral LDAP client will search referral server if the LDAP server has no data to reply to query and if the LDAP server has a referral server Select Serach Name Order that you desire Check the box next to From Field Security Options Note This option is only provided if you have selected the Network authentication option in the user authentication setting You may check this option if you want to search for information in a default email address group Click Apply Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several destinations from the machine by email Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment 1 2 3 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass for
32. Fax numbers are already stored in Speed Dial Individual can be used when selecting Press Add Enter Index Name and Phone Number Index you enter here will be the Speed No in the display screen of your machine Press Apply 6 8 lt Faxing Optional gt Note Speed Dial numbers can be imported from an csv file Using the polling option Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a document This is useful when the person with the original document is not in the office The person who wants to receive the document calls the machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the document be sent In other words it polls the machine holding that has the original Note To use this feature both the sender and receiver must have the polling feature The polling process is as follows 1 Sender stores the originals in the machine Page 6 9 2 Sender gives the Passcode to the receiver 3 Receiver dials the fax number and enters the Passcode when requested Page 6 9 4 Receiver presses Start to receive the stored fax Storing the originals for polling 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 3 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Polling gt Store 7 Ready to Fax Grap Nama cannot be ompty
33. Image tab gt Original Type Select the appropriate option on the screen and press OK e Text For originals with text or line art Text Photo For originals with both text and photographs together e Photo For originals that are continuous tone photographs Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the original document Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Darkness Press the right arrow to enhance the darkness degree and press OK Light v D k ODD Erase Background You can lighten reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned colored paper or newspaper originals Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Erase Background Press On to activate this function and press OK Note Erase Background is disabled if the Original Type is set to Photo Color Mode Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Color Mode Select option and OK e Mono Transmits a fax in black and white e Color Transmits a fax in color Setting up a fax phonebook Use this feature to store destination names fax numbers and transmission settings in your machine There are two options Individual and Group Individual Group Individual Stores up to 200 fax numbers And the fax numbers which are stored in Individual work as Speed No Group Makes groups when you frequently send the same document to several destinations You can store up to 100 group dial numbers Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list
34. Internet Printing Protocol IPP defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs media size resolution and so forth IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers and also supports access control authentication and encryption making ita much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones IPX SPX IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP IP with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP and SPX having similarities to TCP IPX SPX was primarily designed for local area networks LANs and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose typically its performance exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN ISO The International Organization for Standardization ISO is an international standard setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies It produces world wide industrial and commercial standards ITU T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications Its main tasks include standardization allocation of the radio spectrum and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls A T out of ITU T indicates telecommunication ITU T No
35. Originals The first example of something such as a document photograph or text etc which is copied reproduced or translated to produce others but which is not itself copied or derived from something else OSI Open Systems Interconnection OSI is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO for communications OSI offers a standard modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable self contained functional layers The layers are from top to bottom Application Presentation Session Transport Network Data Link and Physical PABX A private automatic branch exchange PABX is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise PCL Printer Command Language PCL is a Page Description Language PDL developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard Originally developed for early inkjet printers PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal matrix printer and page printers PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format PostScript PostScript PS is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas that is run in an interpreter to generate an image Printer Driver A prog
36. Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide l Follow the instructions on Installing Software on page 42 to install the PPD file on your computer 2 Open the Applications folder gt Utilities and Print Setup Utility e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 open System Preferences from the Applications folder and click Printer amp Fax 3 Click Add on the Printer List e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 press the icon then a display window will pop up 4 For Mac OS X 10 3 select the IP Printing tab eFor Mac OS X 10 4 click IP Printer eFor Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 click IP 5 Select Socket HP J et Direct in Printer Type When printing a document containing many pages printing performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option 6 Enter the machine s IP address in the Printer Address field J Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server try using the default queue first 8 For MAC OS 10 3 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer name in Model Name e For MAC OS 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name in Model e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 if Auto Select does not work properly select Select a driver to use and your printer name in Print Using Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default printer 9 C
37. Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more Page 5 3 Page 5 3 Acivanced Original Type t lt ym gt Text Texv Photo Photo more CI ey eo hnacia Magazine Orisinah100 J gt imore So Color Mode Duplex Color B W Auto CS 11Sa p gt mwe piu D a Output Light Dork I lt Uneollated gt more lt gt gt 4 Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen Paper Supply Letter D Letter A Letter A 5 Enter the number of copies using the number keypad if necessary 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying 5 2 lt Copying gt Note To cancel the current copy job press Stop on the control panel Or you can delete the current and pending job using Job Status on the control panel Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete Changing the settings for each copy On the Basic tab of the Copy screen you can select copy features before starting to copy Note The Basic tab setting is only for each copy That means that the setting does not apply to the next copy job After finishing the current copy job the machine automatically restores the default settings after certain time Or the machine resume to default setting when you press the Clear All button on the control panel or when you press other menu such as fax or else except the Job Status screen The default copy setting can be changed in Admin Setting Page 10 2
38. Select File gt Send to gt Send By FTP 2 Send By FTP window opens 3 Add your file and click Upload Email You can send email while working on SmarThru Office Scanning 30 NOTE You need an email client program such as lt WIN OS Ul gt Outlook Express to send email in SmarThru Office Procedure for sending email may differ depending on email client program you are using l Select File gt Send to gt Send By E mail 2 Anemail client opens 3 Type in necessary information and send your email Fax You can send emails while working on SmarThru Office 1 Select File gt Send to gt Send By Fax 2 Send Fax window opens 3 Type in necessary information and click Send Fax NOTE For more information about SmarThru Office click Help gt SmarThru Office Help The SmarThru Office Help window appears you can view on screen help supplied on the SmarThru program Uninstalling SmarThru Office NOTE Before beginning uninstallation ensure that all applications are closed on your computer 1 From the Start menu select Programs gt Samsung Printers 2 Select SmarThru Office and then select Uninstall SmarThru Office 3 When your computer asks you to confirm read the statement and click OK 4 Glick Finish Scanning Process with TWAIN enabled Software If you want to scan documents using other software you will need to use TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop The first time you scan w
39. Sided Rotate Side 2 For originals that are printed on both sides But the back is rotated 180 degrees Note To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 you have to load the originals on the DADF Because if the machine can not detect the original on DADF automatically changes the option to 1 Sided Resolution You can adjust document resolution Press Scan to USB gt the Basic tab gt Resolution Or press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Basic tab gt Resolution Use left right arrows to toggle the values The higher value you select the clear result you get But the scanning time may take longer Resolution lt 300 dpi gt Original Size The machine senses and determines the size of the original Press Scan to USB gt the Advanced tab gt Original Size Or press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Advanced tab gt Original Size 9 3 lt Using USB flash memory gt Use up down arrows to go to the next screen Select the appropriate option and press OK A4 p Letter AS Legal JIS B5 Statement Original Type You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a document being scanned Press Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Original Type Or press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Original Type Select the appropriate option and press OK i Text ect Photo Photo e Text For originals that have text or line art Text Photo For originals that have both text
40. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www ghostscript com It is a known problem that occurs when a color printer is used on version 8 51 or earlier of Ghostscript 64 bit Linux OS and reported to bugs ghostscript com as Ghostscript Bug 688252 The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v 8 52 or above Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http sourceforge net projects ghostscript and install it to solve this problem Common Macintosh problems PDF file does not print correctly some parts are missing in the graphics text or illustrations The document has printed but the print job has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS 10 3 2 Some letters are not displayed normally during the cover page printing When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6 0 or higher colors print incorrectly Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options Note It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image Update your Mac OS to OS 10 3 3 or higher This problem is caused because Mac OS cannot find the font during the cover page printing Alphanumeric characters in the Billing Info field are only allowed for printing on the cover page Other characters will be broken on the printout Make sure that the resolution setting
41. a test page select the checkbox and click Next Otherwise just click Next and skip to step 7 6 If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it 7 Toregister yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung select the checkbox 6 Installing Printer Software in Windows 3 Click Next It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select a language from the list below gt English SAMSUNG j Cancel e f necessary select a language from the drop down list 4 Select Custom installation Click Next Select Installation Type en Select type that you want and click Next button T ypical installation for a local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer c Typical installation for a network printer Install softwares for a device that is on network Custom installation fou can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back New Cancel 5 Select your printer and click Next Select Printer Port em Select a port that will be used for your printer Local or TCP IP Port Shared Printer UNC Add TCP IP Port Advanced Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list Printe
42. and click Delete 4 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window WORLD BEST Using Overlays What is an Overlay An overlay is text and or images stored in the computer hard disk drive HDD as a special file format that can be printed on any document Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and letterhead paper Rather than using preprinted letterhead you can create an overlay containing the exact same information that is currently on your letterhead To print a letter with your company s letterhead you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer You need only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your document Creating a New Page Overlay To use a page overlay you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image l Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay 2 To save the document as an overlay access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 3 From the Advanced tab select Edit from the Text drop down list The Edit Overlay window appears 4 inthe Edit Overlay window click Create 5 In the Save As window type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box Select the destination path if necessary The default is C Formover 6 Click Save
43. and install 2 Bin Finisher first 13 2 lt Ordering supplies and accesso How to purchase To order Samsung authorized supplies or accessories contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine or visit www Samsung com supplies and select your country region to obtain information on calling for technical support 13 3 lt Ordering supplies and accesso 14 Installing accessories Your machine is a full featured model that has been optimized to meet most of your printing needs Recognizing that each user may have different requirements however Samsung makes several accessories available to enhance your machine s capabilities This chapter includes e Precautions to take when installing accessories e Installing a memory module e Replacing the Stapler e Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit Precautions to take when installing accessories Disconnect the power cord Never remove the control board cover while the power is being supplied on To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock always disconnect the power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories Discharge static electricity The control board and internal accessories network interface or DIMM are sensitive to static electricity Before installing or removing any internal accessories discharge static electricity from your body by touching something
44. and photographs together e Photo For originals that are continuous tone photographs Color Mode Use this option to scan the original in Mono Gray or Color mode Press Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Color Mode Or press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Color Mode Select the appropriate option and press OK im Mona e Color Uses color to display an image 24 bits per pixel 8 bits for each RGB is used for 1 pixel e Gray Uses the black gradation to display an image 8 bits per pixel e Mono Displays an image in black and white 1 bit per pixel Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output If your Original document is light or faded press the right arrow to make the output darker Press Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Darkness Or press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Darkness Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then press OK Light o Dark ODD Erase Background You can lighten reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning colored paper or newspaper originals Press Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Erase Background Or press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Erase Background Select the appropriate option and press OK e Off Disables this feature e Auto Optimizes the background e Enhance The higher the number is the more vivid the background is e Erase The higher the number is the lighter t
45. at needs either Tone or Pulse When you select Answering Machine Fax 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel you can receive a fax while the line is being h i hine Page 6 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter used by the answering machine Page 6 9 password and press OK Contact your local telephone company for Dial Mode setting information 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup i i Ring to Answer You can specify the number of times the machine rings before answering an incoming fap Admin Setting 7 Conflict call Genernl Copy Setup l Receive Header Use this option to automatically print the page Terrinal iD Am ehia Secure Receive number date and time of fax reception at the bottom of each page Network Setup Remate Code Araria intei ia Secure Receive You may need to prevent your received faxes Eror Correction TE oe from being accessed by unauthorized people oe U ae This feature restricts printing of received faxes _ when the machine is unattended If you select this option to On all incoming faxes go into memory Note A four digit Passcode is used when you want depending on the international communication regulatory If Page 6 6 the display screen does not show or gray out some of the fax options explained herein it means that the grayed out Received Fax e When receiving a fax containing pages longer function does not supported in your communica
46. box in Share Name field and enter a share name that users will easily identify If you want this printer to be the default printer click the button in Default field Setting up this printer on a server Next gt Cancel To install this software on a server select the Setting up this printer on a server checkbox After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung If you so desire select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish Installing Printer Software in Windows Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership n a a 7 I d like to print a test page NOTE After setup is complete if your printer driver doesn t work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software on page 11 11 Reinstalling Printer Software You can reinstall the software if installation fails Start Windows From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs Samsung Printers your printer driver name gt Maintenance Select Repair and click Next 1 2 The list of printers available on the network app
47. by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or you should press the Release port button if you are sure that the owner is not functioning properly Check if your application has special print options such as oraw If oraw is specified in the command line parameter then remove it to print properly For Gimp front end select print gt Setup printer and edit the command line parameter in the command item The CUPS Common UNIX Printing System version distributed with SuSE Linux 9 2 cups 1 1 21 has a problem with ipp Internet Printing Protocol printing Use the socket printing instead of ipp or install later version of CUPS cups 1 1 22 or higher 12 23 lt Troubleshooting gt Possible Cause and Solution The machine does not appear on the scanners list e Check if your machine is attached to your computer Make sure that it is connected properly via the USB port and is turned on Check if the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system Open the Unified Driver configuration tool switch to Scanner configuration then press Drivers Make sure that the window lists a driver with a name corresponding to your machine s name Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same O interface port the situation of simultaneous access to different consumer applica
48. cali ila i l Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on 1 Connect the device to your computer 2 Turn on the power of the device 3 If New Hardware Wizard is appeared close it 4 Click Next 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and e After connecting the printer click Next then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the e If you don t want to connect the printer at this time click letter which represents your drive and click OK Next and No on the following screen Then the installation If you use Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the Server R2 click Start All programs Accessories gt installation Run e The installation window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK and type If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click After the installation is finished in kin t 3 Siete va Ol E N VO te Continue in the User Account Control window print a test page appears If you choose to print
49. can cause harm to human health or the environment To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local free battery return system Radio Frequency Emissions FCC Information to the User This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference and e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Conne
50. characters and the keyboard pops up on the screen The keyboard below is the default showing the lowercase letters ol oO oO A N 10 Le I Ilom flow i c jopetspefej eps a sje ee ee ee ce sh epefep peppy joy www J ep eede jj Syimbeds Space Shiti w Cama lt JpP Moves the cursor between characters in the input area Backspace Deletes the character on the left side of the cursor Delete Deletes the character on the right side of the cursor Clear Deletes all characters in the input area Input area Enters letters within this line Shift Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase keys or vice versa Symbols Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the symbol keyboard Space Enters a blank between characters OK Saves and closes input result Cancel Cancels and closes input result 3 8 lt Getting Started gt 4 Loading originals and print media This chapter introduces you how to load originals and print media into your machine This chapter includes e Loading originals e Selecting print media e Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray e Loading paper e Setting the paper size and type Loading originals You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying scanning and sending a fax On the scanner glass Make sure that no originals are in the DADF If an original is detected in the DADF the machine gives
51. click Go to access the web site of your machine Click Machine Settings Select Network Authentication on the General Setup of User Authentication web page Click Apply and OK Select the Authentication Type that you prefer Configure the values for each feature as follows Click Apply Network user authenticated by Kerberos 1 2 Enter the realm used for Kerberos login Select IP Address or Host Name 7 3 lt Scanning gt 5 6 Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 88 You can add a backup domain as a previous step Click Apply Network user authorized by SMB 1 2 3 4 Enter the domain that is used for SMB login Select IP Address or Host Name Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 139 You can add a backup domain as a previous step Click Apply Note User can add up to 6 alternate domains Network authorized user by LDAP 1 a FF OQ N Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web site of your machine Click Machine Settings and LDAP Server Setup Select IP Address or Host Name Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 389
52. click Help gt SmarThru Office Help Quick Start Guide This menu displays direct buttons for some features The direct buttons include Categories Binder Life Cycle Scan and OCR Fix and Enhance and Samsung Website You can disable this menu by checking Do not show this diaglog again gt M 5 E amp amp Scan and Fix and Samsung Categories Binder Life Cycle OCR Enhance Website Using SmarThru Office Scanning l Click Scan icon NOTES e In Windows XP operating system you can use SmarThru Office launcher which is on the right end of taskbar to easily open the Scan Setting window e In other operating systems beside Windows XP click the SmarThru Office icon in the tray area of the windows taskbar to activate the SmarThru Office launcher HScan Setting R d ii e Select Scanner Allows you to select between the Local or Network scanner Select Profile Allows you to save settings frequently used for future use Click New Profile to save the setting Scan Settings Allows you to customize settings for Scan Size and Paper Source Scan To Allows you to customize settings for File Name and location to send scanned data NOTE Click Advanced button to set more scan options 3 Set scan settings and click Scan For more information click Help gt SmarThru Office Help Scan To FTP You can upload files to an FTP server while working on SmarThru Office l
53. complex fonts and graphics in the PS language Scanner driver TWAIN and Windows Image Acquisition WIA drivers are available for scanning documents on your machine Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing SmarThru Office This is the accompanying Windows based software for your multi functional machine Scan Manager This program allows you to scan a document on your machine and save it to a network connected computer Direct Printing Utility This program allows you to print PDF files directly SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses You can only use Pv4 setting for SetIP Samsung Network PC Fax You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine Samsung AnyWeb Print This program helps you to screen capture preview scrap and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the ordinary program Click Start gt All programs gt Samsung Priters gt Samsung AnyWeb Print gt Dowload the latest version This tool is available only for Windows operating systems Samsung Easy Color Manager This program helps Samsung color laser machine users to adjust color as they like Users can adjust the printout color as they see them on the monitor The adjusted color can be stored on the printer driver and applied to printouts http solution samsungprinter com personal colormanager Printe
54. content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface Try a different brand of paper Page 4 3 The paper lot is bad The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner Try a different kind or brand of paper If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative Vertical lines Color or Black background AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Toner smear e The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine so the transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Page 11 2 Contact a service representative e The paper path may need cleaning Contact a service representative If black vertical streaks appear on the page e The drum inside the printer has probably been scratched Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Page 11 6 If white vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU Contact a service representative e The inside of the Imaging Unit may be dirty Change the Imaging Unit If vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the scanner glass and its white sheet may be dirty Clean these unit See 11 2 If this problem persists contact a service representative If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable e Change the IBT if it has reached its lifespan e Check the environmental
55. face down on the scanner glass Or load the Originals face up in the DADF Page 4 1 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Press the Image tab gt Erase Edge 4 Select the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Border Erase Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies 5 9 lt Copying gt 5 6 e Small Original Erase Erases 0 25 6mm from the edge of the copies The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature e Hole Punch Erase Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of the copies e Book Center and Edge Erase Erases shadows of a binding or book edge from the center and side edges of the copies This feature only applies when you do copying a book Page 5 7 Note If you have set the Book Copy option to Off you cannot use Book Center and Edge Erase Press OK Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Erasing background images This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the background as in newspapers or catalogs 1 4 5 Load the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass Press Copy from the Main screen Press the Image tab gt Erase Background e Off Disables this feature e Auto Optimizes the background Enhance The higher the number is the more vivid the background is e Erase The higher the number is the lighter the background is Press OK
56. filter The Micro filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet quality Since the DSL Micro filter is not provided with the machine contact your Internet Service provider for use on DSL Micro filter LINE EXT 1 Line port 2 Micro filter 3 DSL modem Telephone line e To use advanced features of the fax press Machine Setup on the control panel and Admin Setting gt Setup gt Fax Setup Page 10 5 Preparing to fax Before you send or receive a fax you need to connect the supplied line cord to the wall jack Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a connection The method of making a telephone connection is varies from one country to another Note If you want to add fax feature to the machine check the option lists Page 13 1 and contact the purchasing point to order When you purchase a fax kit install the kit by following the steps described in the Fax Kit Setup Guide which is enclosed in the kit After installing the fax kit set the machine to use this feature Page 14 3 Sending a fax from a computer You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine To send a fax from your computer the Samsung Network PC Fax program must be installed This program will be installed when you installed the printer driver See Software section Sending a fax from your Computer 1 Open the document to be sent 2 Select Print from the File men
57. in your printer driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader 12 25 lt Troubleshooting gt Caution 1 3 Orderi ng Su ppl les and tv When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies these must accessories be purchased in the same country where the machine was purchased Otherwise print cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine as configurations of print cartridges This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and and other supplies vary depending on the specific country accessories available for your machine This chapter includes Supplies Accessories e Accessories You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine s e How to purchase performance and capacity Note The following accessories are available for your machine The optional parts or features may differ by countries Contact your sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your country Memory module Extand your machine s CLX MEM400 1GB Supplies memory capacity Fax option kit This kit lets you use SCX FAX210 your machine as afax Note After installing machine the kit you have to set up your machine to activate this machine See Page 14 3 Optional tray 2 3 If you are experiencing SCX S6555A frequent paper supply problems you can attach up to two additonal 520 sheet trays You can print documents in various sizes and types of print m
58. in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass for one sheet of paper 1 Press Scan to Server from the Main screen Note If the authentication message shows enter User Name and Password This message shows only when the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web Service Page 11 9 2 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab 3 Select Duplex and Resolution in the Basic tab 4 Press SMB or FTP and select the server from the server list you entered in the SyncThru Web Service CF Ready to Scan MA ine Mailbox Entry should ba selected Pithservas t SiahSerers Total Back Note You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or FTP servers 5 Press Start on the control panel The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified server lt Scanning gt Changing the scan feature settings This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job such as resolution duplex original size type color mode darkness and more The options you change will be maintained for a certain time but after that period the options will be reset to default values Duplex This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned are two sided You can select whether the machine scans only one side of the paper or both sides of the paper Press Scan to Server gt the Basic tab gt Duplex Or Press Scan to
59. is of the smallest file size of the output e OCR Produces scanned output for OCR software You can expect the highest quality images e Simple Scan Used for a simple document with text only The file size of output is small e Custom Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen File Format You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job Press Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt File Format Or press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt File Format p FDF JPEG Tr BMP iidr Page TFF PDF Scans originals in PDF format e Single Page TIFF Scans the originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format and several originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file e Multi Page TIFF Scans originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format but several originals are scanned as one file e JPEG Scans original in JPEG format BMP Scans original in BMP format Note The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode File Policy You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with the scan job through USB If the USB memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name you can rename or overwrite it Press Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt File Policy Or press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt File Policy m Rename Overwrite e Rename If the USB memory already has the same file name
60. it priority over the original on the scanner glass To get the best scan quality especially for colored or gray scaled images use the scanner glass 1 Lift and open the scanner lid 2 Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass 3 Close the scanner lid Note e Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption e Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout Always keep it clean Page 11 2 e If you are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm start copying with the lid open In the DADF Using the DADF you can load up to 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib bond paper for one job When you use the DADF e Do not load paper smaller than 69 W x 145 L mm 2 7 x 5 7 inches or larger than 216 W x 356 L mm 8 5 x 14 inches Do not attempt to load the following types of paper carbon paper or carbon backed paper coated paper onion skin or thin paper wrinkled or creased paper curled or rolled paper torn paper e Remove all staples and paper clips before loading e Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading e Do not load originals that include different sizes or weig
61. l To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties Printing a Document on page 14 2 From the Basic tab select the paper orientation 3 From the Double sided Printing section select the binding option you want 4 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type 5 Click OK and print the document NOTE If your printer does not have a duplex unit you should complete the printing job manually The printer prints every other page of the document first After printing the first side of your job the Printing Tip window appears Follow the on screen instructions to complete the printing job Advanced Printing 23 Change percentage of your document You can change the size of a page s content to appear larger or smaller on the printed page l To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 2 From the Paper tab 3 Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box You can also click the up down arrows to select the scaling rate 4 Select the Size Source and Type in Paper Options 5 Click OK and print the document Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital document size This can be useful when you want to check fin
62. machine values Page 10 1 The touch screen allows for user friendly operation of the machine Once you press the home icon f on the screen it shows the Main screen cee atte EST Machine Status Admin Sethng Usage Page Report Management e cnn bo Email Scan to Server aaan ho Poe A e This button allows you to move to menus on the Main screen CO aaa ea directly e Machine Status Shows the current status of the machine E Shows Help You can find the explanation by feature contents e Copy Enters the Copy menu Fax Enters the Fax menu Optional e Tray Management Shows the currently installed tray and their status You can also change the paper settings for each tray e Admin Setting Allows an administrator to set up the machine e Documents Box Enters the Documents Box menu Page 11 2 e USB When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on Usage Page Report You can see the report on the amount of your machine USB icon will not be grayed out Page 9 1 printouts depending on the type e Scan to Email Enters Scan to Email menu Page 7 2 Job Status button Scan to PC Enters Sean to PC menu Page 7 2 When you press Job Status button the screen shows the lists of e Scan to Server Enters Scan to Server menu Page 7 2 currently running jobs queued jobs and completed jobs e Scan to USB Enters Scan to USB menu Page 11 2 e SmarThru Workflow Enters the SmarThru Workflow menu
63. message 12 11 faxing 12 21 Linux 12 23 Macintosh 12 25 paper feeder 12 15 PostScript 12 23 printing 12 16 printing quality 12 18 scanning 12 21 touch screen 12 15 Windows 12 22 Q quality scanning 7 10 9 5 solving the printing problem 12 18 R Redial Pause 1 5 remote code 10 5 replacing waste toner container 11 8 replacing components imaging unit 11 6 toner cartridge 11 4 replacing stapler 14 2 Report 10 10 Resolution faxing 6 7 scanning 7 9 9 3 S Scan to Email 7 4 confirmation 10 11 Scan to Server 7 7 confirmation 10 11 scanned file format 7 11 9 5 scanning color mode 7 9 9 4 darkness 7 10 9 4 erasing background 7 10 9 4 file format 7 11 9 5 original size 7 9 9 3 original type 7 9 9 4 printing an email report 11 1 quality 7 10 9 5 resolution 7 9 9 3 sending it via email 7 4 sending it via FTP 7 7 sending it via SMB 7 7 solving scanning problems 12 21 USB flash memory 9 2 serial number 11 1 service center registration 10 2 shifting margin 5 10 side cover 1 3 SMB 7 7 sound 10 3 specifications 15 1 16 1 speed dial no 6 7 Stacker 1 2 13 2 stand 1 2 1 3 13 2 staple cartridge ordering 1 2 13 2 replacing 14 2 Start 1 5 Stop 1 5 supplied software 2 1 supplies browsing the supplies life 10 2 checking the supplies life 11 1 expected imaging unit life 10 3 11 6 expected toner cartridge life 10 3 11 3 management 10 3 ordering supplies 13 1 Supplies Management 10 3 SyncThru We
64. name and password Page 6 10 e Back Returns to the Basic tab e c Removes all digits of the selected entry lt Faxing Optional gt Image tab 7 each to Fax i Basic Onginal I ype Tet iooee Erase Background Of Danrovoss oho Wirde Mona e Original Type Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the original document being scanned Page 6 7 e Darkness Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax Page 6 7 e Erase Background Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns as in newspaper originals Page 6 7 e Color Mode Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or color Page 6 7 e Back Returns to the Basic tab Sending a fax This part explains how to send a fax and the special methods of transmission Note When you place the originals you can use either the DADF or the scanner glass Page 4 1 If the originals are placed on both the DADF and the scanner glass the machine will read the originals on the DADF first which has higher priority in scanning Setting the fax header In some countries you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send 1 2 5 Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 6 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Machine ID amp Fax No Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your f
65. necessary select a language from the drop down list Installing Printer Software in Windows 4 Select Typical installation for a local printer Click and click Finish You are now sent to the Samsung web Next site eX Otherwise just click Finish Select Installation Type am Select type that you want and click Next button Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care sasenenssnsssecssnsssnsssssssssssesssssssnessessssnsses g y A ois for 3 Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s State RS See computer Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership Cc Typical installation for a network printer Install softwares for a device that is on network Custom installation You can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back Cancel NOTE If your printer is not already connected to the computer the following window will appear NOTE After setup is complete if your printer driver doesn t work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software on page 11 Connect Device Setup can not find a connected device Check connection between your computer and the printer Custom Installation You can choose individual components to install an
66. not in the table cycle the power and try the printing job again If the problem persists call for service eWhen you call for service it is very convenient to provide the service representative with the contents of display message e Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options or models e xxx indicates the part of the each toner cartridge or each imaging unit e yyy indicates the part of the machine e zzz indicates the error code When you contact the service center this error code help to handle the problem e You may see an exclamation mark 1 or across mark 3 on the upper left of the display in that case press the question mark to browse detailed information on the supplies yyy is worn Replace with new one xxx imaging unit is not compatible Check useris guide xxx imaging unit is not installed Install it Replace with new xxx imaging unit The life of the part expires totally The imaging unit you have installed is not for your machine The imaging unit is not installed or the CRUM Consumer Replaceable Unit Monitor in the cartridge is not connected The imaging unit is at the end of its life When the imaging unit replacement message appears on the screen and if you select Continue this message displays Replace the part with a new one Call for service Install a Samsung genuine imaging unit designed for your machine Ins
67. on the Basic tab of Fax Dialing Group can be also setup comprising of many Individual entries The fax numbers which are stored in Individual work as Speed No Storing individual phone numbers Speed No 6 7 lt Faxing Optional gt 1 4 Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Individual j 9 j Raady to Fax Plvone Mo Erna 133 Hid 5 Goki kinem seo na gM Dehi TMS Golaiereo com Singapore 125 Paans com O22 Doty sS Aritra siso com i Gamma WS Kavitha sieo com 020 Paris 1246 Dip Piso com i usvan Ce e Edit Changes the User Name Speed No Phone No and Email e New Creates the new Speed No and phone no e Delete Deletes the selected Speed No e Search Searches the fax number which currently stored in Individual phonebook When the keyboard pops up enter User Name Detail Shows User Name Phone No Email and Included group information if it is grouped Page 6 7 Apply Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number list in the Basic tab e Cancel Cancels the current job and goes to the previous screen Press New Enter the name of the fax number in the User Name field with the pop up keyboard and the fax number in the Phone No area using the number keypad on the control panel Liar carat Eafe Pc J 035 Picante Mii e User Name Enter the name e Speed No Is automatically filled with the first free number If you want to assign to a di
68. on the control panel Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other destination by faxing 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 6 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Fax Setting gt Send Forward 6 Press On and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel 7 Press OK Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax With this feature you can forward every fax you received to other destination by faxing When the machine receives a fax a fax Is stored in the memory then the machine sends it to the destination you have set 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 6 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Fax Setting gt Receive Forward 6 Press Forward and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel e If you want to set the start time and end time select Start Time and End Time e If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax set the Forward amp Print 7 Press OK 6 12 lt Faxing Optional gt Forwarding a
69. one Page 11 6 If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine e Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1 000 m 3 281ft or above The high altitude may affect the print quality from loose toner or light imaging You can set this option through Printer Settings Utility or the Printer Tab in printer driver s properties See page 3 5 Copying problems Suggested solutions Copies are too light Use Light and Dark arrows to darken or or too dark lighten the backgrounds of copies Smears lines marks or spots appears on copies Copy image is skewed Blank copies print out Image rubs off the copy easily Frequent copy paper jams occur Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner If the defects are on the original press Light and Dark arrows to lighten the background of your copies If there are no defects on the original clean the scan unit Page 11 2 Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package In high hu
70. original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Note If this option is grayed out select the Duplex option to 1 gt 1 Sided Copying ID with the manual ID copy option If you want to copy several ID cards on a paper or adjust the copying position of the page follow the next steps Next steps are the procedure when you copy two people s driver s license cards 100mm X 80mm in one page 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Press the Setup tab gt Copy Setup gt Mamual ID Copy Setup Press the number from the template list table Press Edit Template O oa A Q Selec the appropriate option values and press OK e Template Name Enter the template name e Scan Position Select the position for scanning You should select the largest scanning position out of the originals 9 9 lt Copying gt LEFT TOP X 000mm Y 000mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 110mm Y 090mm 10 11 e Number of Images Select how many images are on a page select number 4 e Image Position Select the position of a page which images are on If you choose to copy four images you have to select four positions here First Image Position LEFT TOP X 000mm Y 020mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 100mm Y 100mm e Sec
71. path Paper Jam inside of duplex path Paper jam in front of finisher Paper jammed inthe Page 12 9 stacker Paper jam inside finisher Paper jammed inthe Page 12 10 Paper jam inside finisher s stacker duplex Paper jam at exit of finisher Paper jammed in the Page 12 11 stacker exit part Caution tv To avoid tearing the paper pull the jammed paper out gently and slowly Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam In the tray 1 1 Open the side cover 12 3 lt Troubleshooting gt 5 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out 2 Open the guide in the direction shown WL open the side cover and then close it to clear the error message on the display J the Tray to align the rear edge with the corresponding slot of the machine then insert it completely Once you remove the jammed paper here 6 Close the side cover and insert the paper tray Lower the rear part of ma AN eS a ak yy Lift the front part of the tray up slightly to release the tray from the If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see any machine 3 Carefully remove the misfed paper in the direction shown paper in this area stop and go to step 4 4 lt Troubleshooting gt 12 4 In the optional tray Note This part explains the method of removing the jammed paper in t
72. pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 6 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side Press Rx Color Printing Press On Press OK 6 14 lt Faxing Optional gt r Scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn hard copy originals into digital files There are two ways to scan originals one is using the USB cable to directly connect the machine with your computer and the other is using the network scan feature which scans and sends to a specific destination via the network If you want to use the USB cable to scan originals refer to the Scanning part of Software section Your machine offers the following ways to scan an image using a local connection e Via one of the preset imaging applications Scanning an image launches the selected application enabling you to control the scanning process e Via the SmarThru program supplied with your machine e Via the Windows Image Acquisition WIA driver If you want to use the network scan feature press Scan on the display to open three options of Scan to Email NetScan and Scan to Server This chapter gives you information about the scanning method and the different ways to send the scanned file to the destination This chapter includes e Understanding the Scan screen e User authentication for network scanning e Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email e Using Samsung Scan Manager e Scanning orig
73. print quality Output Options is for when the staples run out you to let the machine stop processing and wait to refill the staples or continue the job If you set Within Job Offsetting to On the Output paper is placed and sorted by job unit You can also select stapling position for landscape printing with Landscape Stapling Postion Ee PO coca Contention Management Supplies Management Machine Test On Demand Overwrite This feature lets you to select the priority between copy jobs and print jobs e Priority Set the priority by numbering the job The machine starts from the least to the highest number in order First In First Out The machine does an asked job in order You can adjust the loudness of the machine sound Press Fault to adjust the machine s error sound Select Conflict if you pressed the wrong option Press Selection to sound whenever you press the selection from your touch screen The machine gives you the notification of the drum and toner to reorder and resets the used fuser counter bias transfer roller feed roller and document feeder friction pad counter The machine prints the test image patterns using Image Quality Test Patterns You can set the machine to delete previous job information on HDD as you store new job information To activate this feature go to Admin Setting gt the Setup tab gt Optional Service and set the On Demand Image Overwrite option to Enable After activ
74. s request If you select Enable the machine deposits a credit equal to the number of sheets that did not print out correctly then it prints next job for free for the amount deposited With Disable even if you cancel the printing job the machine includes jammed paper in the count and the cost of printing shall be recovered for the pages already billed Image Counter Depends on whether the machine counts blank white pages Change Admin Password You can change the password for the Admin Setting authentication lt Machine status and advanced setup gt Optional Service Adjusting the color contrast When you want to add the optional features for this machine you have to This menu allows you to adjust the color setting install the optional kit and then set the machine to enable and activate those features Follow the next steps to enable those features 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Color i i Ready 3 Press the Setup tab gt Optional Service General Pramit Report Color Taner Oami Aito Caor ore Copy Setup 5 Deunant Box ake aor Aabi On Denard Management Cor Sean to f bruge E Fax Setup veratite c s Ki
75. scanner lamp under the glass Power Save turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan for the fuser unit Page 3 6 This feature allows you to select the tray and paper you use for a printing job Paper size paper type and paper color options are adjusted here Tray Confirmation Message is to activate the window asking whether you set the paper size and type for the just opened tray e Auto Tray Switch If tray1 and tray2 are filled with letter size paper when tray1 is empty and this option is On then the machine continues printing with paper in tray2 Auto Continue When the paper is mismatched meaning that tray1has filled with the letter size paper but the printing job needs A4 size paper the machine will wait for 30 seconds to paper in tray1 with proper sized paper After 30 seconds the machine automatically starts printing with Letter sized paper Paper Substitution When the paper is mismatched this option sets the machine print A4 size paper in the Letter size paper or vice versa Wide A4 It is useful when printing in DOS mode This option prints 80 charactors ina line which printing 78 charactors in a line is usual in DOS mode Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of the machine above sea level This feature lets you adjust the altitude in a height district Higher altitude location need to set this feature to High 3 which affects
76. see the supplied printer s User s Guide 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start All programs Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK and type If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 8 3 Click Next It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select a language from the list below English X Cancel e If necessary select a language from the drop down list 4 Select Typical installation for a network printer Click Next ey Select Installation Type Select type that you want and click Next button c Typical installation for a local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer Typical installation for amp inetwork printer i Install softwares for a device that is on network Custom installation You can
77. sent fax to other destination by an email Note lf Forward to Server Setting is on this option will be grayed out 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 6 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Email Setting gt Send Forward 6 Press On 7 Enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on the display 8 Press OK Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email Note lf Forward to Server Setting is on this option will be grayed out 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 6 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Email Setting gt Receive Forward 6 Press Forward and enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on the display If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax set the Forward amp Print 7 Press OK 6 13 lt Faxing Optional gt Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server 6 7 Note If Forward to Email Setting is on this option will be grayed out The server setting must be done in SyncThru Web Service prior to this option on Press Mac
78. text based protocol where one or more recipients of a message are specified and then the message text is transferred It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the server Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address TCP IP The Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the Internet Protocol IP the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run TCR Transmission Confirmation Report TCR provides details of each transmission such as job status transmission result and number of pages sent This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions TIFF Tagged Image File Format TIFF is a variable resolution bitmapped image format TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners TIFF images make use of tags keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file This flexible and platform independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers which forms the text and images on the printed paper Toner can be melted by the heat of the
79. the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password NOTE You must log in as a super user root to install the printer software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 3 From the Samsung website download and unpack the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer 4 Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in root localhost root tar zxf FilePath SmartPanel tar gz root localhost root cd FilePath cdroot Linux Smartpanel root localhost smartpanel install sh NOTE If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the software you have to use the driver in the text mode Follow the steps 3 to 4 and then follow the instructions on the terminal screen Using Your Printer in Linux 35 Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver 1 When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password NOTE You must log in as a super user root to uninstall the printer software If you are not a Super user ask your system administrator 2 Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in root localhost root cd opt Samsung mfp uninstall root localhost uninstall uninstall sh 3 Click Uninstall 4 Click Next Uninstallation of Unified Linux Driver You are about to uninstall the Unified Linux Dri
80. the Scanner Properties window the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan job To delete a Job Type setting l Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop down list 2 Click Delete The setting is deleted from the list Using the Image Manager The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your scanned image Use these tools to edit the image Bee PST el FH You can use the following tools to edit the image Tools Function H Saves the image Save i Cancels your last action Undo A Restores the action you canceled Reda a Allows you to scroll through the image Cro Crop Crops the selected image area Ei Zooms the image out Zoom Out Zooms the image in Zoom In Allows you to scale the image size you can il enter the size manually or set the rate to Scale scale proportionally vertically or horizontally z Allows you to rotate the image you can ae select the number of degrees from the drop si down list a Allows you to flip the image vertically or Flip horizontally Allows you to adjust the brightness or i contrast of the image or to Invert the os image GS Shows the properties of the image Properties For further details about the Image Manager applic to the onscreen help ation refer 41 Using Your Printer in Linux 10 Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Your machine supports Macintosh sy
81. the Start button Auto crop copying The machine prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank parts like the margin y lt 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 2 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt Auto Crop Press On to activate this feature Press OK N O OFF A Q Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Multi Bin You can choose the output mode for printouts Note You can only use this feature if you have installed optional 2 Bin Finisher or 4 Bin Mailbox 1 Press Copy from the Main screen 2 Press the Advanced tab gt Multi Bin 3 Select the appropriate option Mailbox Printouts are stacked in the bin you have set If you set the mailbox to Bin3 printouts will be stacked in Bin3 e Job Separator Printouts are stacked in the sequence of job order in each bin However if there is a vacant bin left the vacant bin has priority which means prinouts will be stacked there first e Collator Printouts are stacked in sets to match the sequence of Originals in each bin e Stacker Printouts are stacked in bins one by one When Bin1 is full printouts will be stacked in Bin2 4 Press OK Erasing edges You can copy the original without any edges or margins 1 Place a single original
82. the rear side of your machine Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it 2 Press USB from the Main screen 3 Use up down arrows until the file you want appears Select the file name If there is a folder select folder name and press Select 4 Press USB Print 5 Press Start on the control panel to begin printing 9 6 lt Using USB flash memory gt Machine Status screen 1 0 Machine status and Press Machine Setup on the control panel and press Machine Status advanced setup This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine and the method of setting for the advanced machine setup Please read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine s diverse features This chapter includes Machine Setup Browsing the machine s status General settings Copy Setup Fax Setup Network Setup Authentication Optional Service Adjusting the color contrast Document Box Management Printing a report Machine Setup Yv e Supplies Life tab Displays the remainders or the usage count of the machine supplies Use up down arrows to switch screens e Machine Info tab Displays the detailed information about the machine and some options allows for validating your machine Page 10 2 e Back Returns to the previous screen Admin Setting screen Gives you access to detailed machine settings Note When you press Admin Setting a login messag
83. the right side Press Toll Save O a A Q Press On Admin Setting r One Mailbox Entry should be selected General Print Report Copy Setup On Start Time Fax Setup send Network Setup End Time Authentication Optional Service v OK il Cancel 7 Press Start Time and set the start date and time with left right arrows 8 Press OK 9 Press End Time and set the end date and time with left right arrows 10 Press OK Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved in memory 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 6 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side Press Send Batch Press On Press OK When you send a fax if a fax number is same as the number in delay fax the machine asks whether you want to add more documents to reserved delay fax N O81 amp Forwarding a received fax to other destination You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax or an email If you are out of office but have to receive the fax this feature may be useful Note e When you forward a fax by an email you firstly set the mail server and IP address in SyncThru Web Service e If this Fax Forward Settings feature to On you cannot use a fax with the On Hook Dial button
84. this option can speed up your printing time When using Printer fonts the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to those stored in its memory If however you use fonts in your document that are very different from those resident in the printer your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like on the screen NOTE f you click the Reset button settings in the Advanced option returns to the default setting Raster Compression This option determines the compression level of images for transferring data from a computer to a printer If you set this option to Maximum the printing speed will be high but the printing quality will be low Graphic Controller Fine Edge allows users to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability and align each color channel registration in color printing mode Advanced Tab Use the Advanced tab to set various printing options Click the Advanced tab to display the options shown below See Printing a Document on page 14 for more information on accessing printer properties amp Printing Preferences AE Basic_ Paper Graphics Advanced Samsung Watermark Letter Omm EE ora al 8 50 x 11 00 inches inch Overlay li Text None 5 Output Options Print Order Normal v Output Mode Printer Setting v Job Settings Watermark This option allows you to print text o
85. to Available Destination List e Remove Application Allows you to remove an item added by the user in the Available Destination List e File Format Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be saved You can choose among BMP JPEG PDF and TIFF Scan Property Computer ID Shows the ID of your computer e Save Location Allows you to choose the location of the default saving folder Resolution Allows you to choose the scan resolution Scan Color Allows you to choose the scan color Scan Size Allows you to choose the scan size ADF Duplex Automatically scans both sides If your model does not support this option it will be grayed out e Show Preview Checking this box allows you to preview applied scan options You can modify the options before scanning e Default Allows you to go back to default options Change Port tab Change Port Set Scan Button Local Scanner Network Scanner Auto detection on the network O IP Address IP Address Location Local Scanner Select when your machine is connected via USB or LPT port Network Scanner Select when your machine is connected via network port e Auto detection on the network Automatically detects your machine e IP address Enter in your machine s IP address to detect your machine Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server You can scan an image and send it to a total of 5 destinations via the SMB or FTP Prep
86. usable on your line If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the left side of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXxX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company WARNING FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped However where prior notice is impractical the company may temporarily cease service providing that they a promptly notify the customer b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68 You should also know that e Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system e If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine you may experience transmission and reception probl
87. web site or use them to create projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software or the WIA driver This chapter includes e Scanning Using SmarThru Office e Scanning Process with TWAIN enabled Software e Scanning Using the WIA Driver NOTE e Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide e You can check your printer name in the supplied CD ROM e The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors including computer speed available disk space memory the size of the image being scanned and bit depth settings Thus depending on your system and what you are scanning you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions especially using enhanced dpi Scanning 29 Scanning Using SmarThru Office SmarThru Office is the accompanying software for your machine You can use SmarThru Office to scan images or documents from local or network scanners Starting SmarThru Office Follow the steps below to start SmarThru Office l Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Once you have installed SmarThru Office you will see the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop 3 Double click the SmarThru Office icon am Strat Tht eats SS ae Office E 4 The SmarThru Office appears For more information
88. which means the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper For instance if you print 6 sheet of original papers every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side e Staple Portrait Adds a single staple to all of your portrait of a paper and every odd numbered pages of originals will be oriented output printed on the back side of a paper EI e Reverse 1 gt 2 Sided Rotate Sided2 Scans originals and prints them on both sides of a paper But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals The machine prints the second original first which means the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper For instance if you print 6 sheet of original papers i every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a paper and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on the back side of a paper The information on the back Note side of the print out is rotated 180 degree The Staple feature is available with an optional stacker amp F stapler Page 13 1 gt RUI 1 Staple Landscape Adds a single staple to all of your landscape oriented output M o a 5 4 lt Copying gt Selecting the type of originals Press the Basic tab and select an appropriate original type Text Text Photo Photo qa j ca j E Magazine EH e Text Use fo
89. you save new job on it 10 8 lt Machine status and advanced setup gt ee a re Auto Color The machine virtually prints certain patterned image Registration to calibrate the color printing position This feature enhances the colored image sharper and clearer which means the machine prints the colored image on the paper more like the one in the monitor Select On to activate this feature You can set the frequency of performing the function by pages temperature of a machine or LSU e Page Condition The machine performs this feature after certain number of page has been printed out Inner Temperature Condition The machine performs this feature if the machine temperature Is different from the last this feature done If you set this option to 3 the machine detects the inner temperature and when the temperature difference is over or below three degree the machine will perform this feature You can set the temperature difference by clicking arrows LSU Temperature Condition The machine performs this feature if the temperature of LSU Laser Scanning Unit is different from the last this feature done If you set this option to 3 the machine detects the temperature of LSU and when the temperature difference is over or below three degree the machine will perform this feature You can set the temperature difference by clicking arrows Execute Now The printer executes the auto color registration now Be en er Au
90. you to choose how to print or save the printing file by using the optional HDD e Print Mode The default Print Mode is Normal which is for printing without saving the printing file in the optional HDD e User I D This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel e Job Name This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel Samsung Tab Use the Samsung tab to display the copyright and the version number of the driver If your computer is connected to the Internet you can have access to following services Click the Samsung tab to display the options See Printing a Document on page 14 for more information about accessing printer properties Help This option allows you to open the Help file by searching a keyword Service e Check for updates This option allows you to download updates for your printer driver e Samsung Website This option directly connects you to Samsung Website e Registration This option allows you to register your machine e Buy Supplies This option allows you to order supplies on line Using a favorite setting The Presets option which is visible on each preferences tab except for Samsung tab allows you to save the current preferences settings for future use To save a Presets item l Change the settings as needed on each tab 2 Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box Printing Preferences 7
91. 0 Click Browse to find a mono driver for your printer ex Windows XP 32 bit Select CD ROM drive gt Printer gt PC_ MONO gt WINXP_2000_VISTA 32 11 Select inf file and click Open 12 Click OK in the Install From Disk window 13 Select a mono driver in the Printers field and click Next 13 NoTE If you have installed a mono driver before then the Use Existing Driver window Select as the window explains and click Next Also depending on your computer configuration the printer sharing window or the print the test page window may appear make the appropriate selection 14 Enter your printer name and click Next 15 Click Finish to start installing a mono printer driver NOTE If your printer is connected to a network go to printer s Properties and select the Ports tab then click Add Portand Standard TCP IP Port and create a new port to connect to the printer To create a new port follow the procedure laid out in the wizard window Installing Printer Software in Windows 2 Basic Printing This chapter explains the printing options and common printing tasks in Windows This chapter includes e Printing a Document e Printing to a file PRN e Printer Settings Basic Tab Paper Tab Graphics Tab Advanced Tab Samsung Tab Using a favorite setting Using Help Printing a Document NOTE e Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the
92. 0 sheets 75 g m 20 Ib bond 2 Bin Finisher 600 sheets 75 g m 20 Ib bond e 2 Bin Finisher amp 4 Bin Mail box 1000 sheets 75 g m 20 Ib bond Power rating AC 110 127 V or AC 220 240 V See the Rating label on the machine for the correct voltage frequency hertz and type of current for your machine Power e Average operation mode Less than 650 W consumption e Power save mode Less than 20 W e Standby mode Less than 100 W e Power off mode 1 W Noise level Standby mode 40 dB A e Printing mode 54 dB A e Copying mode 57 dB A Boot up time e Less than 30 seconds from sleep mode e Less than 70 seconds from power off The boot up time will be longer if data volume is a lot in the HDD Operating Temperature 10 C to 32 C 50 F to 89 6 F t es Humidity 20 to 80 RH Display 7 inch WVGA 800 x 480 Color TFT graphic LCD with Touch Screen 16 bit color 64k Color Toner cartridge Average continuous black cartridge yield 20 000 standard pages Average continuous Yellow Magenta Cyan Consumables cartridge yield 15 000 standard pages Life e Imaging unit Approx 30 000 pages e Waste toner container Approx 48 000 images Standard 1 280 MB 1 024 MB main memory and 256 MB fixed IP memory Maximum Expandable to 2 304 MB Slots One available DIMM slot for expandable memory External 606 8 x 575 0 x 815 5 mm without optional dimension trays 23 89 x 22 64 x 32 11 inches W x
93. 1 9 2 Software overview WOP SOIW O aa E T S A E E 2 1 FNS FCI Ne I Se sorcerien senina acest A ee ie tence ter boseciaa cus gvemeuacossd d uecteateeeeoec ance esetceenenetesceee 2 2 See AE E o 0d lt 0 koe eee ee RP ee ert E ee ee ee ee eee 2 2 3 Getting Started Setting up the hardware ccavinsscccsensiavrsancescnnantdpncivnseshwvennnswnkaeueandsnpnrsPondontvaninesanoeeseaeanonrseeesnsdnensnnnposeaeterepundusiuaiucenenndse 3 1 Seting a Color A sesse ineas E Paw eee epic ais ENEA REAR ENEE NAE E i 3 1 STEMI TS TIC IVY OVI aerae A E E E E EEEN 3 2 S pported operating Systems scorrere ennan a K a Eai NEKANE ERNE a KaR EEE EESE ONER UK NEE NE NEEE 3 2 Configuring network protocol via the machine cccccccccccceeeeeeseeseeceecececeeseueaseueeeeeeeeeeeseessaeaeaesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 2 MoMo IS SOW ACY e E EE E E E a 3 3 Using Me SSN PO CN seisseen e tenet e E Ae AEE T E EE EE EO E EE 3 4 PAVE GU SUI a E EESE PE O EN EE TT E EAE E AOE E E E E 3 5 Machine s basic Settings aaa eee nee eee aaea i ee aodai ira ai eee kasia 3 6 Setting the authentication DASSWONG ixisicnscvsisidsuinedeisnaeswanrsonmaaguadteovenies a ri E Ea aiaa 3 6 Soling the date and UME ep teccesyepineotecrrresinsingpnihecocissieg va eeen a E a a E EO ESE EEE aeaa E RE aE isda 3 6 Changing the display language ccccccceeessseeeeecceeeceeeceeeeeeseceeeeceeeessueasaessseceeeeeeesesaaeaesseceeeeeceeeeeessesaeasaeeeseeeeees 3 6 UN JOO UM OUN eea E N EN E AE E aiteiane
94. 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsimile transmissions JBIG Joint Bi level Image Experts Group JBIG is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality which was designed for compression of binary images particularly for faxes but can also be used on other images 16 2 lt Glossary gt JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over P IP LED A Light Emitting Diode LED is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine MAC address Media Access Control MAC address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter MAC address is a unique 48 bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs e g 00 00 0c 34 11 4e This address is usually hard coded into a Network Interface Card NIC by its manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks MFP Multi Function Peripheral MFP is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body so as to have a printer a copier a fax a scanner and etc MH Modified Huffman MH is a
95. 10 3 10 6 Interface e High Speed USB 2 0 e Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX a Print speed will be affected by operating system used computing performance application software connect on method media type media size and job complexity b Please visit www samsung com printer to download the latest software version Copier specifications tem o Copy speed Up to 38 cpm in A4 40 cpm in Letter First copy out e From ready Less than 13 seconds time e From coldboot Less than 85 seconds Copy resolution DADF e Scan Up to 300 x 300 dpi text text ohoto magazine photo e Print Up to 600 x 600 dpi text text ohoto magazine photo Scanner glass Platen e Scan Up to 600 x 600 dpi text text ohoto magazine photo e Print Up to 600 x 600 dpi text text ohoto magazine Up to 1 200 x 1 200 dpi photo Zoom rate e Scanner glass Platen 25 to 400 e DADF 25 to 200 Multiple copies 1 to 999 copies a SDMC Copy speed is based on single document multiple copy 15 2 lt Specifications gt Scanner specifications Facsimile specifications optional a a Compatibility TWAIN standard WIA standard Compatibility ITU T G3 Scanning method DADF and Flat bed Color CCD Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network Charge Coupled Device module PSTN or behind PABX Resolution TWAIN Up to 600 x 600 dpi Up to 4 800 x Data coding MH MR MMR JBIG JPEG Tx only standard 4 800 dpi by software enh
96. 10 5 eUser permission If you check this option only users with user permission can start a print job eGroup permission If you check this option only groups with group permission can start a print job Job Setting This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file by using the HDD Printer ue fm Presets Standand EH Caples E Ri Collated Tero Siehed Pages All O From l tec I Paper Size US Letter BRE 6 50 by 11 00 inches Orientation IB a Job Seming Print Adload Normal i T Scene to HD User 10 rigel A 7 0 9 Job Haime Untied A r 0 9 EAMSUNG ia DFe f Supplies 7 t Cancel 1 Print X A Mac OS 10 5 e Print Mode The default Print Mode is Normal which is for printing without saving the printing file in the optional HDD eUser ID This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel eJob Name This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Printer Features Advanced Options Printer ge fal Precete Standard E Copies i e R Collated Two Sided Figes all n Fram i to l Paper Sire Us Letter E 650 by 1100 inche Orientation Al le Printer Features HH Feature Sets Advanced Options wy eerie Mipir Pannag La i keh ft Darker Text Fn to Page Prompt User RoR Color Standard ea AWMac OS 10 5 Reverse Duplex Printing Allows you to
97. 3 Press the Setup tab gt Copy Setup vacant bin has priority which means prinouts will be stacked there first i j Rendy General Setup Print Re port e Collator Printouts are stacked in sets to match the sequence of originals in each Copy Setup Flu D Cog Page Number bi n oe Setup e Stacker Printouts are stacked in bins one by one When Bin1 is full printouts seers __ Time sedate will be stacked in Bin2 Authentication Note Optional Service E ID Stamp You can only use this feature if you have installed optional 2 Bin Finisher or m 4 Bin Mailbox ae Page Number If you select this option On each copy will include the page number on the bottom of each page Time amp Date Set this option On in order to print the date and time on each copy set from the General tab This option is used to set words or a message to print on your copies Set this option On and an input screen will be displayed write your message using the pop up keyboard Manual ID Copy This option sets the ID copy settings such as Setup the number of images or copying positions manually Page 5 5 10 4 lt Machine status and advanced setup gt FS eon O o This machine offers you with various options to you for setting up the fax Fax Initial Setup You can set Receive Mode for Telephone Fax system You can change the default settings for your preferences and or Answering Machine Fax and Dial Mode
98. 7 5 individual fax number 6 7 Interrupt 1 5 jam clearing paper from the duplex unit area 12 9 clearing paper from the exit area 12 8 clearing paper from the fuser unit 12 8 clearing paper from the multi purpose tray 12 7 clearing paper from the optional tray 12 5 12 6 clearing paper from the stacker finisher 12 9 clearing paper from the tray1 12 3 clearing the original from DADF 12 1 clearing the original from scanner glass 12 2 tips for avoiding paper jams 12 11 Job Status 1 5 1 9 JPEG 7 11 9 5 K keyboard 3 8 L language 3 6 LED 1 5 Interrupt 1 7 Power Saver 1 7 Status 1 7 LINE socket 1 4 Linux problems 12 23 requirements 2 3 M Machine Info 10 1 Machine Setup 1 9 10 1 machine status 10 2 Machine Status 1 9 Macintosh problems 12 25 requirements 2 3 Mailbox creating Mailbox 6 10 deleting the data of the Mailbox 6 11 Mailbox List 6 10 Mailbox No 6 10 Mailbox Passcode 6 10 polling 6 9 printing a Mailbox 6 11 sending to remote Mailbox 6 11 storing the originals 6 10 Maintenance 11 1 maintenance parts 11 9 toner cartridge 11 3 memory DIMM installing 14 1 message on the display screen 12 11 Mono 7 10 9 4 multi purpose tray 1 3 N network port 1 4 requirements 3 2 setting up 3 2 10 6 notification receiving a fax in Mailbox 6 10 N up copy 5 6 O OCR 7 10 9 5 On Hook Dial 1 5 hardware 1 5 sending a fax 6 4 optional service 10 8 optional tray 1 2 1 3 13 1 ordering suppl
99. 9 2 cups 1 1 21 has a problem with ipp Internet Printing Protocol printing e Check if the printer driver is installed in your system Open the Unified Driver configuration tool and switch to the Printers tab in the Printers configuration window to look at the list of available printers Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list If not use the Add new printer wizard to set up your device e Check if the printer has started Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list Look at the description in the Selected printer pane If its status contains stopped string please press the Start button After that normal operation of the printer should be restored The stopped status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred For instance this could be an attempt to print documents when the port is claimed by a scanning application Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same O interface port the situation of simultaneous access for different consumer application to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them is allowed to gain control over the device at a time The other consumer will encounter device busy response You should open the ports configuration and select the port assigned to your printer In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied
100. Address button The Set IP Address window appears Do as follows EJ Set IP Address em You can set or change IP address for the network printer IP Address MAC Address Ca M lt Mm Information Update Printer MAC Address IP Address Configure Subnet Mask Default Gateway lt Back Cancel a Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the list b Configure an IP address subnet mask and gateway for the printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP address for the network printer c Click Next 6 Select the components to be installed After selecting the components the following window appears You can also change the printer name set the printer to be shared on the network set the printer as the default printer and change the port name of each printer Click Next Set Printer em Change printer settings to be installed Port Default Printer Shared Name NOTE If you cannot find your machine in network please turn off the firewall and click Update For Windows operating system click Start Control Panel and start windows firewall and set this option unactivated For other operating system refer to its on line guide 10 A You can change the printer name by selecting the name and entering a new name in the Printer Name Field lf you want other users on the network to access this printer click the check
101. Apply Note If you do not know the network interface s MAC address print the machine s network information report See page 11 1 for Printing a machine report 10 Click OK to confirm the settings 11 Click Exit to close the SetIP program Altitude adjustment The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print Before you set the altitude value find the altitude where you are using the machine Value 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 6 4 Press the General tab 5 Press Altitude Adjustment 6 Select appropriate option and then click OK Note Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web site of your machine Click Machine Settings gt Setup or Machine Setup gt Altitude Adj Select the appropriate altitude value and then click Apply lt Getting Started gt Machine s basic settings After installation is complete you may want to set the machine s default settings Check the next explanation if you would like to set or change values Setting the authentication password To set your machine up or change the settings you have to logi
102. BG 8 26 by 11 69 inches Pages p D POF Supplies A Low Cancel Print A Mac OS 10 5 3 Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop down list 4 Select the page order from the Layout Direction option To print a border around each page on the sheet select the option you want from the Border drop down list 5 Click Print and the printer prints the selected number of pages on one side of each page 48 Duplex Printing You can print on both sides of the paper Before printing in the duplex mode decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document The binding options are e Long Edge Binding Which is the conventional layout used in book binding Short Edge Binding Which is the type often used with calendars l From your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu 2 Select the Layout Printer al a Presets handiret bS Copies 1 4 Collated _ Two Sided Pages All OlFrom 1 te 1 Paper Size A4 4 8 26 by 11 69 inches G PFF Supplies A Low Cancel Prine A Mac OS 10 5 3 Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing option 4 Click Print and the printer prints on both sides of the paper CAUTION f you have selected duplex printing and then try to print multiple copies of a document the printer may not print the document in the way you want In case of C
103. Basic Paper Graphics Advanced Samsung Watermark Letter Omm Watermark v A Sa nee s Onh y Overlay Text None v Output Options Print Order Normal v Request Offset Output Mode Printer Setting l ROETE o n SAMSUNG 3 Click Add When you save Presets all current driver settings are saved If you click Add the Add button changes to Update button Select more options and click Update settings will be added to the Presets you made To use a Saved setting select it from the Presets drop down list The machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected To delete saved setting select it from the Presets drop down list and click Delete You can also restore the printer driver s default settings by selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop down list Using Help Click from the upper right corner of the window and then click on any option The help screen gives detailed information about the printing features provided by the printer driver 20 Basic Printing Advanced Printing This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing tasks NOTE e Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use However the composition of the printer properties window is similar e If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplie
104. BbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page e The toner supply is not enough You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life If this does not improve the print quality install a new toner cartridge The color tone might not be adjusted Adjust the color tone Page 10 8 The paper may not meet paper specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough Page 4 3 If the entire page is light the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off See the help screen of the printer driver and refer to Software section respectively A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning Contact a service representative The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU contact a service representative The paper may not meet specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough Page 4 3 The transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Contact a service representative The paper path may need cleaning Contact a service representative Check the location of the machine If the area is not well ventilated this problem may occur Page 3 1 If faded areas generally rounded occur randomly on the page e A single sheet of paper may be defective Try reprinting the job e The moisture
105. CLX 8540ND Series H Functional Fae User s Guide imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product 2009 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved This user s guide is provided for information purposes only All information included herein is subject to change without notice Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages arising from or related to use of this user s guide CLX 8540ND is model name of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett Packard company Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System Inc UFST and MicroType are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc TrueType LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased Due to different voltage frequency telecommunication configuration and etc CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products Bisa a Gare Canine Web Site contact the Samsung customer care center oe eee ain ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 JAPAN 0120 327 527 www
106. During the fusing process wet ink can come off preprinted paper reducing print quality Note Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems requiring repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreements 4 5 lt Loading originals and print media gt Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray To load longer sizes of paper such as Legal sized paper you need to adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray paper length guide 2 paper width guide Note If you have installed an optional high capacity feeder refer to Quick Install Sheet to adjust paper size 1 Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length It is preset to Letter or A4 size depending on the country To load another size hold the lever and move the length guide to the corresponding position 2 After inserting paper into the tray while pinching the paper width guide as shown move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the paper the guide may bend the paper Note e Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp e If you do not adjust the paper width guides it may cause paper jams 4 6 lt Loading originals and print media gt Loading paper Loading paper in tray 1 optional tray or optional high capacity feeder Lo
107. E fa Precete Standard es Copies l wf Collated Two Sided Fages fel Full From 1 to l Paper Sire us Letter re 6 50 by 1100 inches Orientation a i Printer Features H Feature Sets Transparency Separator PE Transparency Separator None HH Loft a ieparator Sourte hone HH Cancel G G Pore Supplies AMac OS 10 5 eTransparency Seperator You can place transparency separator sheets between printouts eSeperators Source You can choose the source for seperators Smart Color Printer H a Pracete Standard Copies 1 B M Collated C Two Sided Fages al From l to i Paper Size UG Letter 6 50 by 1100 inches Orientation Ti Primer Features HH Feature Sets Smart Color WA Fine Edge ON O W 7 C Supplies Cancel Print AMac OS 10 5 Fine Edge Allows users to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability and align each color channel registration in color printing mode Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature provides a cost effective way to print draft pages l From your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu 2 Select Layout Printer ER fa Presets Standard a Copies 1 A Collated Two Sided Pages All OFrom 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 nS Orientation li Te layout W
108. EEE aE 7 5 Entering email addresses by the address book ccccccccccsesseeeeeececaeeeeeeeeeseeeeueeeeeeseseeeseeeeeesseaeseeeeeeesssseeeeeeees 7 6 Entering email addresses by the keyboard cccccecccccsseeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeeeceeaseeeeeeseeeseeeeesseaaeeeeeeesaeaaseeeeeesssaageeenes 7 6 Using Samsung Scari Manager lt iscnceccatescenedsinescscscteacsanattadsccdesteetesasestiesdsdieasoasedadcentagetiemzncsadetdlestioudetansucusignedeteiecueasaccs 7 6 Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server seseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaacseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeess 7 7 Preparation for scanning to SMB FTP cccccscsccacccccctoceccosessasecdacnenececteccadeeasseenedecensdececadasessuecsdesesseccdsesneaseesdeedeceosedes 7 7 Scanning and sending to SMB FTP server ccccccccccsseeeeeseeeeeeceeceeecceaeessesuceeeeeeeesssaseesseeeeeeceseeessseaasseeeeeeeeeeeees 7 8 Changing the scan feature settings ccccccccsccseseecececcceeeeeceeeeessseeceeeeeeeessseeeseeeeeeeeeeeessssaaeeseseeeeeeeeeesssesaaaasaeeeeeeeeeess 7 9 BE EA EE E A E E A A EE E E E E AE E E E E T 7 9 ROS OO r E a E 7 9 IGA 12 E E EE T A E E E E E A ou E EA E EE E T E 7 9 Mona TI sera E ccs E E E A 7 9 VON NOOO seere E E E A E E A E E er oeeetesebebeeees 7 9 BES SS AE E IEA AE ate EAE AA E O AE A E EEA A A E AAE TT 7 10 ASS aC OIG eee a E E A E E E 7 10 1672 1 Oe oS nee nent E E rn Meer E E A AAN A te eee E T eee E E A A ET eee 7 10 I ers rete E A
109. Email gt the Options tab gt Duplex Use left right arrows to toggle the values e 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only e 2 Sided For originals that are printed on both sides e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 For originals that are printed on both sides But the back is rotated 180 degrees Note To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 you have to load the originals on the DADF Because if the machine can not detect the original on DADF automatically changes the option to 1 Sided Resolution You can adjust document resolution Press Scan to Server gt the Basic tab gt Resolution Or Press Scan to Email gt the Options tab gt Resolution Use left right arrows to toggle the values The higher value you select the clear result you get But the scanning time may take longer Resolution os a Commonly 100 dpi 200 dpi and 300 dpi resolution are available only when Color Mode is set to Color or Gray The following table shows detailed information feature resolution and file format options 100 200 300 600 B W PDF Single Page 100 200 300 TIFF Multi Page TIFF Gray Color JPEG Scan to PC 75 150 200 300 600 PDF Single Page TIFF Multi Page TIFF JPEG Scan to Server 100 200 300 600 B W PDF Single Page 100 200 300 TIFF Multi Page TIFF Gray Color JPEG Original Size You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the pre defined size or p
110. Fax mode to receive the fax 5 Press OK Note When the memory is full the machine can no longer receive any incoming fax Secure free memory to resume by removing data stored in the memory Receiving manually in Telephone mode You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine The machine begins receiving a fax Receiving automatically in Answering Machine Fax mode To use this mode you must attache an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine Page 1 4 If the caller leaves a message the answering machine stores the message as It would normally If your machine detects a fax tone on the line it automatically starts to receive the fax 6 5 lt Faxing Optional gt Note e If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is switched off or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined number of rings If your answering machine has a user selectable ring counter set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is connected to your machine you must switch off the answering machine or the outgoing message from the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation While the machine is receiving a fax you can not do the copy job Receiving faxes man
111. IO sorre r e E E E ee ee ee eee 5 7 BOOKIE ODINO sage ensreeshacrcecea perc acs a e A r 5 7 ogee VIN EE AE T E E E E A E E E EEE A A P 5 8 Transparency CODYINO seseccotscnncatcnesterteccececerieat ence beenecceaecdese teaotetenetie ae seeneceeire sic E e ara eea ian 5 8 EEEE E SAA a EAE A E PEA E E E E E AE AE A E E 5 8 DU EAEE L EA EE ITT A O E E E A NENA A EE E E 5 9 AUO CODEN e E A ere meer er eae 5 9 EEE oeae A E E E E E beeer etd edencececedeee 5 9 Erao NM SS eene E E E EN 5 9 Erasing background IMAGES seccosredececenaecdocentacnttechanctaedecacescasaeaneudehededtonsccteoassiechedeAiendeieancceecacamecanadechendenacecistcees 5 10 SAAS eea E R E 5 10 Gray enhance CODyYNiO seris ee E E a ke eee ee 5 10 Adjusting backside images asciccn denne xescceeecnadescednaxtee nap iasucsanestosaceuesnnasedeeoendenasananasepenceoans tence hacmaseaseedacdeensuee canrs 5 10 6 Faxing Optional FOS SGN VO Wee EE E E E E R E E ae 6 1 Sending a lax iom a COMPUTER resset e EE E Ee EERE EE EEEE EEEE 6 1 Sending a fax from your Computer cccccccccecceeeseseeeeceeeeceecesaeeesessceeceeeeeeeeeseeaaeeesseceeeeeeseessaeasaesseaaaagaeeeseeeeees 6 1 Checking a sent fax list ccccccccccccssceeeesesseeeceeeceeeeseseeeeeueessceeeeeeeeessaeeesseseceeeeeesesssaeaesseseececeeesessaesasegsgeeeeeeeeeees 6 2 Understanding the Fax screen scsi aces cvapiiecumiseticcetdantsacsinna semieielsseiosentiannissiecuviniestlnadniciealt sl ensiceaisiecisctvawsvieceuievaen
112. J If the jammed paper is not visible pulling and continue on to step 5 If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see any paper in this area stop and go to step 4 lt Troubleshooting gt 12 6 In the multi purpose tray Insert the paper tray and close the two covers 7 If the paper is not feeding properly pull the paper out of the machine 1 J AAW yO fy WY 2 Open and close the side cover Printing automatically resumes lt Troubleshooting gt 12 7 3 Open the guide in the direction shown and pull the jammed paper gently out of the machine In the paper inside the machine The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the Note machine Open the side cover 1 4 Open and close the front cover to resume printing In the fuser area Open the side cover 1 in the direction shown J 2 Remove the jammed paper in the direction shown 2 Remove the jammed paper go to step 3 J If you do not see any paper in this area lt Troubleshooting gt 12 8 In the duplex unit area If the jammed paper is inside the fuser remove the jammed paper in the direction show If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly paper jam may occur Make sure that the duplex unit is inserted correctly Open the side cover 1 2 Remove the jammed pa
113. Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ 45 Ethernet cable Make sure you turned on the machine Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting a A W N When the login message appears enter password Touch the password input area then the question marks appears Use the number keypad on the control panel to enter the password Once the password is entered press OK Factory setting 1111 6 Press the Setup tab gt Network Setup 7 Select TCP IP Protocol 8 Press IP Setting lt Getting Started gt 9 Select Static and then enter IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway address fields Touch the input area then enter addresses by number keypad on the control panel Print Repori Copy Seo lu naa DHCP P Nddross O00 000 000 000 Fax Setup Network Setup Baie Subnet Mask 000 000 000 000 furthentication SS Batia OO 00 RO arh Optional Seri Sslatn Y DE Jil Cancel Note Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure 10 Press OK Note You can also set up the network settings through the network administration programs e SyncThru Web Admin Service Web based printer management solution for network administrators SyncThru Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access Download this pro
114. New Folder Makes a new folder on the USB memory device e Detail Views the details of currently selected folder or file e Rename Renames the folder or file name e Delete Deletes the folder on the USB memory device e Duplex Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value File Name Names a file before you scan a document by just clicking this field e Back Returns to the previous screen Advanced tab CT Requesting chenbent ist Mease wal Output ta ire F e Original Size Sets the originals to a specific fixed size Page 9 3 e Back Returns to the previous screen 9 2 lt Using USB flash memory gt Image tab Requesting element list Please wait Advanced Original Type a Color Mode Mono Darkness E T Erase Background oti Scan to Edge oti e _ e Original Type Selects whether the original is text text photo or photo Page 9 4 e Color Mode Selects the color options of the scan output If the Original is color and you want to scan in color press Color Mode Page 9 4 e Darkness Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output Use left right arrow to adjust the values Page 9 4 e Erase Background Erases backgrounds like paper patterns Page 9 4 e Scan to Edge
115. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Shifting margins You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page H a y e lt Place a single original face down on the scanner glass Or load the originals face up in the DADF Page 4 1 Press Copy from the Main screen Press the Image tab gt Margin Shift Select Margin Shift option e Off Disables this feature e Auto Center Automatically centers of the paper copy The original must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature This option supports only the original is loaded on the scanner glass e Custom Margin Adjusts the margin of the left and right top and bottom as you want using arrows This option supports both on the scanner glass or in DADF 5 Press OK 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Gray enhance copying When you copy the original in gray scale use this feature for the better quality of copy output This feature is only for the copy in gray scale 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass Or load the Originals face up in the DADF Page 4 1 Press Copy from the Main screen Press the Image tab gt Scan Enhance Press On to activate this feature Press OK Press Start on the control panel to begin copying O oo Ff W N Adjusting backside images When the original is thin and the back side imgaes are shown though you can use this feature to re
116. Printer Properties Printing a Document Using the properties window provided by the Printers configuration you can change the various properties for your aii s ma E aE Printing from Applications l Open the Unified Driver Configurator There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to print from using Common UNIX Printing System CUPS You If necessary switch to Printers configuration can print on your machine from any such application Properties File menu Printer Properties 3 Inthe LPR GUI window select the model name of your General Connection Driver Jobs Ciasses machine from the Printer list and click Properties Name Printer x 4 p I EHE a idle accepting jobs aE C ick i o Location e e x TE Description Set as User Default Page Selection Copies Allpages Copies t 100 h v Even pages E cCollat pies v Ox pages I Revere Ai Pages 2 1 Help OK Cancel v Some pages cee Enter page numbers a ot pages to print separated by commas 1 2 5 10 12 17 The following five tabs display at the top of the window General allows you to change the printer location and name The name entered in this tab displays on the Help o Gancer_ printer list in Printers configuration eConnection allows you to view or select another port If you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice 4 C
117. Printer Software CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears Click Next e If the installation window does not appear click Start gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK e If you use Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK e If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control windows Click Next SAMSUNG Welcome to Setup This wizard will help install components It is strongly recommended that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup This printer will automatically substitute fonts shown on your screen with similar looking fonts located in the printer To avoid substitution go to the Extras tab of the printer driver and do not check Use Printer Fonts Select a language from the list below English X 2 00 83 05 Cancel e Select a language from the drop down list if necessary lt Getting Started gt 5 7 Select Typical installation for a network printer and then click Next Select Installation Type Select type that you want and click Next
118. Printers Direct Printing Utility gt Direct Printing Utility Or double click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top The Direct Printing Utility window opens 2 Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section and click Browse 3 Select the PDF file you will print and click Open The PDF file is added in the Select Files section 4 Customize the printer settings for your needs See the next column 5 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the printer Using the shortcut icon l Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer NOTE If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer opens Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section 2 Customize the printer settings for your needs 3 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the printer Using the right click menu 1 Right click on the PDF file you will print and select Direct Printing The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is added 2 Select the printer you will use 3 Customize the printer settings for your needs See the below part 4 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the printer Sharing the Printer Locally You can connect the printer directly to a selec
119. RE 1800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com sg WWW FINLAND 30 6227 515 www samsung com fi__ FSLOVAKIA 0800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com sk FRANCE 01 4863 0000 www samsung com fr Fi I A a SOUTH 0860 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com za GERMANY 01805 SAMSUNG 726 AFRICA 7864 0 14 mi S ns 902 1 SAMSUNG 902 172 www samsung com es GUATEMALA 1 800 299 0013 678 He ____ _ _ aki SWEDEN 075 SAMSUNG 726 78 64 z www samsung com CHF 0 08 min ai a gt SUNG ee moe aes ae TADJIKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 OU WWW PUNGAY aea TAWAN 0800 329909 THAILAND 1800 29 3232 www samsung com th 1800 110011 02 689 3232 1800 3000 8282 TRINIDAD amp 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com INDONESIA 0800 7128888 TOBAGO 7864 atir ITALIA 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 TURKEY 444 77 11 Country Customer Care Center 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com ae 8000 4726 UK 0845 SAMSUNG 726 7864 USA 1 800 SAMSUNG 7267864 8 800 502 0000 UZBEKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com kz ru VENEZUELA 0 800 100 5303 latin VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 CONTENTS ADOUtLMIS USE S 6 6 lt Sennen ee ne Pee Ce ee ee eee eee Finding imore WATONMIAUION sssrin EEE EO RE E EAE OA EEDE EREE EE RRE Safety and Regulatory Information cccccccccessssssseeeccececeeeeesaeaeeesseceeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseseeaseseseeeeeeeeeseeseaaaaaeeeseeeeeees ii 1 Introduction Pece IE rero E E 1 1 Machin
120. S erore A T E E E E E E ener 12 16 Pinuno ODIEM sode A T E E nade seoaetnceeee 12 18 CoD GCOS en E E E T E E 12 20 SCANN ODIE E S T E T 12 21 Fax problems Optional ecsresismisriieesnin n A A A aE eaa a a E 12 21 Common Windows problems ccccccsecsccsesesseeceececeeeeeeeeceaeaseseseeceeeeeeseesaeeeeesseeeeeeeeeesseseaeueseeeeceeeeeesessaaaagaeeeees 12 22 Common PostScript problems asacicecancciesececczecone dh arectaecthedicoscatdageenscanasciencanesy aa oap chomectossdaceauacddnadactosetevesns 12 23 Common Cmo probea ssrt AEREE SEOD 12 23 COMMON Macintosh problems cccccecsscesessesseececeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeseseeeeeeeeesseeaaeaeeeseeeeeeeeesssessueassseceeeeeeeeseesssaasaeeeess 12 25 13 Ordering supplies and accessories ace E E S EE E N O P A E E E E E A AT E E E E A 13 1 EE SONICS A T EA PE EEE PETE A A E A E E T 13 1 POW TOO UNG ASC teers rece rer aor E E E EEE E E E e 13 3 14 Installing accessories Precautions to take when installing accessories cccccecccseeeeececeeeeeeececeeceeeseeeeeseueeeeeseaeeeessaeeeessaaaeeeesssaneeeseaanes 14 1 installing a memory Module se cee scticeeececetcntiecinacedstcies decesceeeauce a aiaa dana aa dania ii 14 1 Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties cccccccccccsessseeceeeceeeeeeeeeesseaeeeeeeeeseseaeeeeeeesaaaaeees 14 2 Replacing The Staple srrsrrenksnrnn eoo nra EE EE S ESR E EE AEE ER EROE REESE 14 2 Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option ki
121. Scans originals from edge to edge Page 9 4 e Back Returns to the previous screen Output tab Advanced Sean Preset Sharing and Printing File Format PDF File Pobcy Rename Back e Quality Adjusts the scan quality of the scan output Page 9 5 e Scan Preset Automatically changes some scan options such as file format resolution and more You can adjust options to fit each specific purpose Page 9 5 File Format Selects the file format of the scan output Page 9 5 e File Policy You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with the scan job through USB Page 9 5 e Back Returns to the previous screen Changing the scan feature settings This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job such as resolution duplex original size type color mode darkness and more The options you change will be maintained for a certain time but after that period the options will be reset to default values Duplex This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned are two sided You can select whether the machine scans only one side of the paper or both sides of the paper Press Scan to USB gt the Basic tab gt Duplex Or press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Basic tab gt Duplex Use left right arrows to toggle the values e 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only e 2 Sided For originals that are printed on both sides e 2
122. Select a stable location Select a level stable place with adequate space for air circulation Allow extra space to open covers and trays Under the altitude 1 000 m 3 281 ft is effective for printing See the general settings for Altitude Adjustment in page 3 5 The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat cold and humidity Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table A aa Slo Yo 100 mm 500 mm e J r 3 9 inches 19 7 inches pam 600 mm 23 6 inches A horizontal plane must be within 5 mm 0 02 inches both from front to rear and from right to left eo 4 o 2 ee Caution e When you move the machine do not tilt or turn it up side E down or the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the printer or bad printing quality e If you are moving the machine or if machine is not in use for a long time turn on the power and wait until it goes in to the ready mode Then close the scan lid and turn the power off And open the scan lid and lock the scanner lock Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items Remove the tape holding the machine tightly Install both the toner cartridges and imaging units Load paper See page 4 7 for Loading paper Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine N O CFF A W N Turn the machine on Note This equipment will be inoperable when mains pow
123. T OPENEN ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTR LNING VED BNING UNDG UDSAETTELSE FOR STR LNING ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTR LNING N R DEKSEL PNES UNNG EKSPONERING FOR STR LEN VARNING OSYNLIG LASERSTR LNING N R DENNA DEL AR PPEN STRALEN AR FARLIG VAROITUS NAKYMATONTA LASERSATEILYA AVATTAESSA VARO SUORAA ALTISTUMISTA SATEELLE it FFEA Asm ite Ma F 0 FHS SH Hjogo SSa VOSS FOAL AWG American Wire Gauge Ozone Safety During normal operation this machine produces ozone The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator However it is advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area If you need additional information about ozone please request your nearest Samsung dealer Power Saver This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time power consumption is automatically ENERGY STAR lowered ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U S marks For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http www energystar gov Recycling Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner as Correct Disposal of This Product Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate
124. The The machine is not machine does not print receiving power The machine is not selected as the default printer Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers Remove each transparency as it exits from the machine Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes Suggested solutions Check the power cord connections Check the power switch and the power source Select Samsung CLX 8540 Series PCL 6 or Samsung CLX 8540 Series PS as your default printer in your Windows Check the machine for the following e The side cover is not closed Close the side cover e Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam Page 12 3 e No paper is loaded Load paper Page 4 7 e The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not installed Install the toner cartridge or imaging unit If a system error occurs contact your service representative The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect it cue does not print continued The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source A print job is extremely slow The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective The port setting is incorrect The machine may be configured incorrectly The printer driver may be incorrectly installed The machine is malfunctioning The document size is so big
125. The name appears on the Overlay List 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window The file is not printed Instead it is stored on your computer hard disk drive NOTE The overlay document size must be the same as the documents you print with the overlay Do not create an overlay with a watermark Advanced Printing 25 Using a Page Overlay After an overlay has been created it is ready to be printed with your document To print an overlay with a document l Create or open the document you want to print 2 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 Click the Advanced tab A Ww Select the desired overlay from the Text drop down list 5 Ifthe overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop down list select Edit from the list and click Load Select the overlay file you want to use If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source you can also load the file when you access the Load window After you select the file click Open The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing Select the overlay from the Overlay List box 6 If necessary check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box If this box is checked a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your document If this box is no
126. U 0Sa 3 E22 03 g E sew Q Q Fa x5 OE QL E S 2 oD o 3 QODc coc T oO oO c eg T S a go Ww Q 2 o gt SB TES Lo 2 57o 85 ES Dx V Lo o 42 CE 5 y D ab A 4 qr P T cos O gt EGE Se L gt O O p Q Q o oa c2 cC O a c lt Vo c E c D C gt Ore DZ S O GS O pm O 9 o 2 2 wT T ee ee op 6 Ley FE 2 3 S28 ZEZE 0 p220 34 Z c DOM ot ES O D O acc cu FG 56 Q 507 35 6 FO O O Q p ODO OP CoO EQ O W oc So L ba N ae 7 Remove the new imaging unit from its bag lt Maintenance gt 11 6 Caution Don t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the imaging unit package You could damage the surface of the imaging unit 8 Remove the paper protecting the surface of the imaging unit 9 Remove the cap and carefully pull the seal tapes out of the imaging unit Note If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric Caution e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit e To prevent damage do not expose the imaging unit to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper to protect it if necessary 11 Labels inside the machine identify each imaging unit s position Holding the handles on the new imaging unit push the imaging unit until it locks in place
127. Windows PostScript Driver 5 Using Direct Printing Utility This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files without having to open the files CAUTION e You can not print PDF files that are restricted to print Deactivate the printing restriction feature and retry printing You can not print PDF files that are restricted by a password Deactivate the password feature and retry printing Depending on how a PDF file was created it may not be able to be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program Depending on the installation of Hard Disk on your printer PDF files can or can not be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program e The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version 1 4 and below For a higher version you must open the file to print it Overview Direct Printing Utility Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your printer without having to open the file It sends data through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer driver It only supports PDF format To installing this program you should select Custom installation and put a check mark in this program when you install the printer driver Using Direct Printing Utility 27 Printing There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing Utility From the Direct Printing Utility window l From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs Samsung
128. ad the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the tray 1 The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 520 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib bond plain paper 2 After inserting paper into the tray while pinching the paper width guide as shown move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the paper the guide may bend the paper You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to load an additional 520 sheets of paper Page 13 1 1 To load paper pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the side you want to print facing up Note e When using a transparency avoid using transparency without stripe band or with stripe band on the longer side of the paper Note It might cause a paper feeding jam e Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp e If you do not adjust the paper width guides it may cause paper jams 3 After loading paper set the paper type and size for the tray See O X page 4 9 for copying and faxing or Software section for PC printing e Place the side to be printed facing up Note Preprinted paper If you experience problems with paper feed place one sheet at a time in the multi purpose tray 4 7 lt Loading originals and print media gt In the multi purpose tray The multi purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of prin
129. agen ae aE E aea a a an 11 2 Cleaning ihe ModE eae E E T EER 11 2 Cleaning the scan UMi sessirnar EE ec eect EEEE E aa KEE E A aS 11 2 Maintaining the toner cartridge cccccssssseeecceesececceeseecceasececceeueceescaaeeeeceuaeeseseeeeessageeesseaseeeessusecesseaeeeesssaseees 11 3 Tonercanidge SION ACS aese E E a E ance teneemscnase 11 3 BAUM MAS UG CONS sesira esaeen oiia a aan aa esaer eie ia ap iaeei ardo re ernir 11 3 Use of non Samsung and refilled toner cartridge cccccccccecesseececceaeeuseceececauauseeceeseeaeueceeeesssaaeeseesesaagseeeeees 11 3 Expected carkidge liE seurueen nh neie neee i p a enin eaei aiii nee ene eee 11 3 FRE CIS tHDUIANG TONGI sarkonirinciisipeusen ae a ee aE acest e a e 11 3 Replacing the toner cartridge cccccssssceccceeecececeeseecceesecececeuseecesauseeeecsaseeeeseuseceesseeeeecseaeeeesseeeessageeeessnaneesessagss 11 4 Replacing the Imaging UMI sssscsrrrossrrinorsi eE ae E ak Ea n EREE e a Er E a a E 11 6 Replacing the waste toner container cccceesececceeseececeeseeecceuseeeescaueeeeceuseeeeeseaeeeeeseusecessaaaeeeessaseeeesseaeeeessaseeeessnaes 11 8 Mamtenanco Pans ssrin aE ERE EEE EEE TEE EEEE EESE 11 9 Managing your machine from the website cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeececaeeeeceeeeeeeaaeasceeeeeseeeaseeeeeesssaeaseeeeeeeesssenseeeeees 11 9 12 Troubleshooting Tips for avoiding paper VAIS saisai innamen onni niea ine anaE nRa ET pae AR EAEE ina KaR AREEN NA De
130. amsung Scan Manager Note You can open Samsung Scan Manager by right clicking the Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and seleting Scan Manager 2 Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan Manager window 3 Press Properties 4 The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the saving destination and scan settings add or delete application program and format files You can change the scanning machine by using the Change Port tab Local or Network 5 When setting is done press OK lt Scanning gt Set Scan Button tab Set Scan Button Change Port Scan Destination Available Destination List Destination O dd Folder EJ Email Y Microsoft Paint eS SmarThru Office lt i Front Panel Destination List Destination My Documents JPEG File Format Remove Application 7 Scan Property Computer ID MANUAL CADocuments and Settings HJHiMy DocumentsiMy Pic on foodie s s Color Scan Size Ad v c ff Default l Cancel Save Location Resolution Scan Color Scan Destination e Available Destination List Shows the list of applications currently linked to scanned images in the PC s registry Select the program you want to use and click the right arrow and add to Front Panel Destination List e Front Panel Destination List Shows the list of applications to open scanned image e Add Application Allows you to add application you want to use
131. an advisory document EG 201 121 which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TS 103 021 terminals The product has been designed against and is fully compliant with all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2001 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http Awww openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without 5 prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 6 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL P
132. ancement Modem speed 33 6 Kbps WIA standard Up to 600 x 600 dpi Transmission speed Approx 3 seconds page Scan to USB 100 200 300 dpi Maximum document length e Scanner glass 356 mm 14 inches Scan to PC 75 150 200 300 600 dpi DADF 356 mm 14 inches Scan to Email 100 200 300 600 dpi B W Resolution Black amp Standard Scan to Server 100 200 300 dpi Gray Color White Up to 203 x 98 dpi Scan File format PDF TIFF JPEG Fine Up to 203 x 196 dpi Effective scanning length e Scanner glass 348 mm 13 7 Super Fine Fine photo inches Up to 300 x 300 dpi e DADF 348 mm 13 7 inches Up to 406 x 392 dpi Up to 203 x 392 dpi Rx only Effective scanning width Max 208 mm 8 2 inches Standard Color bit depth e Internal 36 bits Up to 200 x 200 dpi e External 24 bits Fine Up to 200 x 200 dpi Mono bit depth e 1 bit for Linearity amp Halftone Super Fine e 8 bits External 12 bits Up to 200 x 200 dpi Internal for Gray scale Halftone 256 levels HDD Stroe 500 jobs Memory a Due to the applications for scanning the maximum resolution might differ b JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in scan color Auto dialer Speed Dial Up to 200 numbers a Standard resolution MMR JBIG Maximum modem speed Phase C by ITU T No 1 chart Memory Tx ECM b Rx stands for receiving a fax 15 2 lt Specifications gt 1 6 Glossary Note The following glossary helps you get familiar
133. aration for scanning to SMB FTP Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the scanned file Note The next steps are for SMB server setting using SyncThru Web Service and the setting for FTP server is the same as SMB Apply the same steps for setting up the FTP server 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Machine Settings gt SMB Setup gt Server List The Server List is then displayed on the right side of the screen 5 Click Add 7 lt Scanning gt 6 Select the index number from 1 to 20 7 Entera name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server List entry This name will be displayed on your machine 8 Select IP Address or Host Name 9 Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name 10 Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 139 11 Enter the share name of the server 12 Puta check mark next to in Anonymous if you want to allow the SMB server to be accessed by unauthorized persons By default this is unchecked 13 Enter the login name and password 14 Enter the domain name of the SMB server 15 Enter the location for storing the scanned image This is the location you entered in step 7 16 Click Apply Scanning and sending to SMB FTP server 1 Place the originals face up
134. aterials in each tray When the toner runs out or the life span of the supplies expires you can order the following types of toner cartridges and supplies for your machine pe e Pan Toner cartridge Average continuous CLX K8540A Black black cartridge yield 20 000 standard pages Average continuous CLX C8540A Cyan colored cartridge yield 15 000 standard pages CLX M8540A Yellow Magenta Magenta evan CLX Y8540A Yellow Imaging unit Approx 30 000 pages CLX R8540K Black CLX R8540C Cyan CLX R8540M Magenta CLX R8540Y Yellow Waste toner Approx CLX W8380A container 48 000 images ea dia erwise the a Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798 machine can fall down b Image counts are based on one color on each page If you print documents in and break causing full color Yellow Magenta Cyan Black the image count will be added by 4 injury to human images High Capacity If you are frequently SCX HCF100 Feeder experiencing paper Caution When using supply problems you the optional High can attach an Capacity Feeder you additional 2 100 sheet must install the foot as tray shown in the Optional High Capacity Feeder Install Guide provided with the optional High 13 1 lt Ordering supplies and accesso You can place the machine on the ergonomically designed cabinet which lets you reach the machine conveniently Also you can easily move the cabinet with its whee
135. ating this feature you can overwrite a HDD by pressing Start in the display HDD Spoolling To spool documents in HDD for the network printing select On Stored Job File Policy Country You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed with the job through HDD If the HDD memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name you can rename or overwrite it e Rename If the HDD already has the same file name when you entered a new file name the file will be saved as a different file name that is automatically programmed Overwrite If the HDD already has the same file name when you entered a new file name the previous file will be recorded over with the new file You can change the country then some of the values for fax and paper size will be changed automatically for your country After installing the fax kit you must change the country Home Window You can change the touch screen s background Background image 10 3 lt Machine status and advanced setup gt ee ee You can choose the output mode for printouts For copy output you can set up several options in advance e Mailbox Printouts are stacked in the bin Bin3 printouts will be stacked in Bin3 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter e Job Separator Printouts are stacked in password and press OK the sequence of job order in each bin However if there is a vacant bin left the
136. ault Scaling Options Fit to Page None v Percentage 100 3 25 400 Copies Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed You can select number of copies to be printed for color and grayscale each You can select from 1 to 999 copies Paper Options Paper Options allows you to choose paper tray you want to use NOTE When printing on an envelope select the Envelope tab to set the options e Size This option allows you to set the size of paper to be loaded in the tray This setting appears in the list so that you can select it e Source Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray Use MP Tray when printing on special materials such as envelopes and transparencies e Type This option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray This setting appears in the list so that you can select it This will let you get the best quality printout If not the desired print quality may not be achieved Plain Normal plain paper Select this type if your machine is monochrome and printing on the 60 G m2 16 Ib cotton paper Thick 90 to 120g m2 24 to 32 Ib thick paper Thin 60 to 70 g m2 16 to 19 Ib thin paper Cotton 75 to 90 g m2 20 to 24 Ib cotton paper such as Gilbert 25 and Gilbert 100 Color 75 to 90 g m2 20 to 24 Ib color backgrounded paper Preprinted 75 to 90 g m2 20 to 24 Ib preprinted paper Recycled 75 t
137. ax number Press OK Sending a fax 1 2 Press Fax from the Main screen Place the originals face up in the DADF Adjust the document settings in the Image tab Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab Note If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper select 2 Sided with left right arrows in the Duplex feature When the cursor is blinking in the input line enter the fax number using the number keypad on the control panel Or use Address 6 3 lt Faxing Optional gt Book on the right side of the screen if you have stored frequently used fax numbers Fax Mo STSS6T8 7 Basic Kt OST234567 Address Book 2 037654321 Individual Group ef Mig Klg Resolution Sh es Standard j gt ames Renee A 6 To add a number press Add No 7 Press Start on the control panel The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations Note e When you want to cancel a fax job press Stop before the machine start transmission Or press the Job Status button and select the job you want to delete press Delete e If you used the scanner glass the machine shows the message asking to place another page e While the machine is sending a fax you can not send an email at the same time Page 7 4 Sending a fax manually On Hook Dial 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up into the DADF Adjust the documen
138. ax number input area Shows the recipient s fax number using the number keypad on the control panel If you configured the phone book press Individual or Group Page 6 7 e Add No Lets you add more destinations e Deletes the last digit entered e Remove Removes the selected fax number entry e Remove All Removes all the fax numbers in the input area e Address Book Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly from your machine or from SyncThru Web Service Page 6 8 e Duplex Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the Original both sides of the original e Resolution Adjusts the resolution options Advanced tab Image Delay Send Off Pronty Send ot Polling Mailbox e Original Size Selects the size of the original document Press OK to update current setting e Delay Send Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without your intervention Page 6 4 Priority Send Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations Page 6 5 e Polling Used when the receiver requests the document to be faxed remotely at sender s absence or vice versa In order to use the polling function the originals must be previously stored in the machine Page 6 9 e Mailbox Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine memory which are ready to be polled You can use a mailbox on the same machine you are using or the one on a remote machine Each mailbox has a corresponding mailbox number
139. b Service 11 9 email address 7 4 fax settings 6 8 SMB FTP setting 7 7 System timeout 3 6 telephone 6 5 terminal ID 10 5 TIFF 7 11 9 5 toner cartridge 1 3 toner reorder notification 11 2 touch screen problem solving 12 15 tray adjusting the width and length 4 7 optional tray 1 3 tray1 1 3 troubleshooting 12 1 U USB port 1 4 USB flash memory printing 9 6 scanning 9 2 W waste toner container replace 11 8 Windows problems 12 22 requirements 2 2 REV 1 03 Samsung Printer Software section SOFTWARE SECTION CONTENTS Chapter 1 INSTALLING PRINTER SOFTWARE IN WINDOWS Installing Printer Software 2 ccc ccccc cece cece cece eee eee e eee een E EEE EERE EEE EEE SE SEES EES DE EEE ESSE ESSE ES GGEEE EEE SESE EEEEEES 5 Installing Software for Local Printing cece cc cccee cece eee recess eee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeesganntensggags 5 Installing Software for Network Printing ccccccceeecee cece eee eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeeeganeees 8 Reston Printer SORW aie uracserrcuetansieeasersameresrire A eraawencanacsmteadhes 11 REMOVING Printer SoftWare sciccdcnrdutavaaeneniwaceenrias rner Meenas Eaa EE E 12 Installing Mono printer driver Gaerne eer te tre nr retary A A nee ee ne eee tee 13 Chapter 2 BASIC PRINTING IME Ce HIOCUNICIIE dasri raae cuedieuentecaeeceuekaauedcaceaste sine onic cesta uenraeedieaunnasssedewonutece 14 Printing toa Tie PRIN srcsrerisrior
140. ble is loose or defective The wrong printer driver was selected The software application is malfunctioning The operating system is malfunctioning The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner The file may have blank pages Some parts such as the controller or the board may be defective Change the page orientation in your application See the printer driver help screen Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray Or ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect Try a print job that you have already printed successfully If possible attach the cable and the machine to another computer and try a print job that you know works Finally try a new printer cable Check the application s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected Try printing a job from another application Exit Windows and reboot the computer Turn the machine off and then back on again Redistribute the toner if necessary If necessary replace the toner cartridge Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages Contact a service representative PDF file does not print correctly some parts are missing in the graphics text or illustrations Before printing the machine emits vapor nea
141. button Typical installation for a t local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer ve Typical installation for a network printer Install software for a device that is on network You can select installation options This option is recommended for professional users C Custom installation lt Back Cancel The list of printers available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next Select Printer Port a Select a port that will be used for your printer f TCP IP Port Shared Printer UNC C Add TCP IP Port Advanced Select a printer from the list below IF you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list IP Port Name Printer Name NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing the installer from Update detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on this PC before continuing with the installation ie ta e If you click the Advanced button you can search a printer with the SNMP Community Name Default name is public e If you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the printer To verify your printer s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuratio
142. c OS X A 4 Using Smart Panel 32 Click this icon in Linux x If you are a Windows user from the Start menu select Programs or All Programs Samsung Printers your printer driver name Smart Panel NOTE e If you have already installed more than one Samsung printer first select the printer model you want in order to use the corresponding Smart Panel Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select your printer name e The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this Software User s Guide may differ depending on the printer or Operating System in use The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the printer the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge s and various other information You can also change settings 8 Buy Now Tioubteshooting Guide printer Setting f Driver Setting O Toner Level You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge s The printer and the number of toner cartridge s shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in use Any printers do not have this feature Buy Now You can order replacement toner cartridge s online Troubleshooting Guide You can view Help to solve problems Printer Setting If you connect your printer to a network the SyncThru Web Service window appears instead of the Printer Settings Utility window Driver Setting Only for Wi
143. canned image onto a USB memory device When you scan a document the machine uses the default settings such as the resolution You can also customize your own scan setting Page 9 3 If your USB memory device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide Scanning 1 Insert an USB memory device into the USB memory port on the rear side of your machine 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 3 Press Scan to USB from the Main screen Or press USB gt Scan to USB Select the appropriate option Page 9 3 Press OK Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning N Oo OO Ff After scanning is complete you can remove the USB memory device from the machine Scan to USB Basic tab Zc Requesting element lst Please wait Advanced Name Date Fie 2020208 File 2 2 20209 Resolution Directory 2213 20210 ws odi peen Directory2 ZVALA File Name Fle3 245420212 Untitled New Folder Baek e Name The folder names on the USB memory device e Date Tha date which folders are made e Select Selects the folder which has been chosen from the Name e
144. ccc ccc cece eee seen eee esse eee eeeseeeeeeeesaeeeeeaaaaeeneesgeneeeeegas 34 Installing the SmartPanel cccccccce cece cece eens eee eee eee e eee eee e eee e eee e Sees ness eEE SSeS aGeE EEE SaSEEEE EE EaaS 35 Uninstalling the Unimed EINUX DIVER scoccisiwronvsnssaernssnvenastonbres a A a aoai 35 Using the Unified Driver Configurator sssssrrrsssrrrrrerrrrsrrrrrrrrrrerrrrrrerrrerrrrrenrrrsrrrrrerrrrrerrrrerne 36 Opening the Unified Driver Configurator ssrsrienrscassirna dr a E 36 Printers Configuration sscsspicsesgerdangraaieyin chet tyre snracia EE TE EEE E tia insite a a 36 SCNNETS COM OUI ALIONL sirsiran EEE AAR E EEEO 37 POPs COMMOULARON serrrrrn eire rr ar ee e a a E 37 CONTIGS PANC PrOD ES srpa EE E AE N EEES 38 PRIMING a DOCUMENT sesagvecetiyseevas lt aa a EEEE E EEE E ETS 38 Printing from APppPIICAUONS ssiacisciadisncivensecnisiariaetesteiseas tn ANAA emer Aaaa iii 38 PENNO FIE oana E E E T O 39 SCPG a DOCU srerrenre rie EDANE EA ERAAN AER E 39 Usma tne Miage ManogoT criccacvreasanager nai NOONE OSEAN 40 USING YOUR PRINTER WITH A MACINTOSH OSANO SOWA arniran raS EE E E E A 42 Uninstalling software esssssssrrsessrrrssrrrrnerrrrrerrrrerrrrrorrrrtt rrtt errr rr rrr orr rrr rr rrrrerrrr sada aaaeeodanha 42 Set UO C PNE I oreren erar a EE 43 For a NCTWORK CONMECIEE screadan a a E E T a E E teak nada 43 Fora USB Connected senserat rer a E EEE EL EEEE 43 PEO a E T E A 44 PRINEING a DOCUMEN seeireGeran
145. ce src E E cutie os emies Se E E peo ee be ciggeeeqipe A EA E N TE TET 9 4 EL EBA RO A a capsecte ten cece octet reece ae tceie eanwmiceaeineretcetnaoe tens ecesttaet atedet a etacnoset ese neeeene tases seeuneraesacerteeenratoscsee 9 4 CNO EOE ee eee ne eee eee Se ene ere ee E ee eee ee ee ree ee 9 4 OM ic especie hc cena otes eat Sarcoma es cence E S 9 5 POSO E E E T E E E E E 9 5 EFRO MA e a S eae se oeeme csc onmeseeeecoeeee 9 5 PN POMC ETE EEES E IEA TA E E E P P E EE IE TEPEE T 9 5 Printing from USB memory devi 2 0 cccccecccsssseseeeeceeceeeeeeseeeaesseeeeeeeeeeseeseeaeaesseseceeeeeesesssaeasseescseseeeeeeeeeeesesaaaas 9 6 To print a document from a USB memory device ccccceeecceceeeecceceeeeceecseeeeeceeeceeecuseeceseuaueeeeseaeeesseeeeeeessaees 9 6 10 Machine status and advanced setup RAGING SONIDO stceectaces cee tec dcenentctensteeescasided a A a E 10 1 Machine Status screen sc asec sccet da thos cet sxceicecead JaSecsocatsedecybedesanodeoeassemsatcas eeenecdsidcecmesdaeddeed pnccisiapsanoeecdeeanermtueseanece 10 1 Admin Seting Sree eee eee ne ee eee eee ee ee eae EA 10 1 Browsing the machine s status ccccceseecceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeceneeeeecseeeceeeeeaeeeeceeaeeeeeseeaeeeeesaeeeessaeeseeeesseseeessaeeeesesaaneees 10 2 Gonera EOS ea E A e a 10 2 CODY OCD ere E R A E A Sean artes ances 10 4 FSU e pests eta oe E E bees pease ede ceacic ueeapeeeeseseserdeon cee 10 5 PSV OU casero ec tons natin pas pee dermis cei
146. cel Note You can also access this window by simply double clicking the printer icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control panel 8 1 lt Basic printing gt 9 Using USB flash memory This chapter explains how to use an USB memory device with your machine This chapter includes e About USB memory e Understanding the USB screen e Plugging in an USB memory device e Scanning to an USB memory device e Scan to USB e Changing the scan feature settings e Printing from a USB memory device About USB memory USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documenis presentations downloaded music and videos high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move You can do the following on your machine using an USB memory device e Scan documents and save them on an USB memory device e Print data stored on an USB memory device e Format the USB memory device Understanding the USB screen To use the USB memory device press USB or Scan to USB on the Main screen If the screen displays an other menu press F4 to go to the Main screen 0101 2006 12500 AM Copies 001 alal Doament Hox eee Scan to Email San to Server scan ho PE Scan bo USE Note When an USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine USB icon shows o
147. ceten cadena T a aah 44 Changing Printer Settings an iutsrnisrcinateapeladyata a a aa a A 44 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper ccc cece cece ee ee sees eee eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeegnneeeags 48 DUPIOX PFIBEING ivatcceamiads iaiudidinsd aA E 48 S COMMING issan ra a a a a a eeeeaous 49 SCAM WIU USB wisi Alnmpianmt aaa a e aeea 49 SCANN WIENINELWORK cornier a a a Ea 49 Installing Printer Software in Windows This chapter includes e Installing Printer Software e Reinstalling Printer Software e Removing Printer Software e Installing mono printer driver NoTE The following procedure is based on Windows XP for other operating systems refer to the corresponding Windows user s guide or online help Installing Printer Software You can install the printer software for local printing or network printing To install the printer software on the computer perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on the printer in use A printer driver is software that lets your computer communicate with your printer The procedure to install drivers may differ depending on the operating system you are using All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning installation Installing Software for Local Printing A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer using the printer cable supplied with your printer such as a USB or parallel cable If your printer is attached to a network
148. collection systems This marking on the product accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories e g charger headset USB cable should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal Correct disposal of batteries in this product Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems This marking on the battery manual or packaging Indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with other household waste at the end of their working life Where marked the chemical symbols Hg Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006 66 If batteries are not properly disposed of these substances
149. composition and the scan resolution for the image eScan Area allows you to select the page size The Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings select from the Job Type drop down list For details about the preset Job Type settings see page 40 You can restore the default setting for the scan options by clicking Default 8 When you have finished click Scan to start scanning The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the progress of the scan To cancel scanning click Cancel 9 The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager tab MTD Ot If you want to edit the scanned image use the toolbar For further details about editing an image see page 40 Using Your Printer in Linux 40 10 When you are finished click Save on the toolbar 11 Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the file name 12 Click Save Adding J ob Type Settings You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later scanning To save a new Job Type setting Change the options from the Scanner Properties window Click Save As Enter the name for your setting Click OK A WUN he Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop down list To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job 1 Select the setting you want to use from the J ob Type drop down list 2 The next time you open
150. compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU T 1 4 MH is a codebook based run length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space As most faxes consist mostly of white space this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes MMR Modified Modified READ MMR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 6 Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information MR Modified Read MR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 4 MR encodes the first scanned line using MH The next line is compared to the first the differences determined and then the differences are encoded and transmitted NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell Inc It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack Today NetWare supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX OPC Organic Photo Conductor OPC is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the printer and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches from grits of a paper
151. conditions very dry conditions low humidity or a high level of humidity higher than 80 RH can increase the amount of background shading Remove the old imaging unit and then install a new one Page 11 4 Clean the inside of the machine Contact a service representative Check the paper type and quality Page 4 3 Remove the imaging unit and then install a new one Page 11 4 Change the IBT if it has reached its lifespan lt Troubleshooting gt Suggested solutions Vertical repetitive If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side defects of the page at even intervals e The imaging unit may be damaged If a repetitive mark occurs on the page run a cleaning sheet through several times to clean the cartridge contact a service representative After the printout if you still have the same problems remove the imaging unit and then install a new one Page 11 4 Parts of the machine may have toner on them If the defects occur on the back of the page the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages The fusing assembly may be damaged Contact a service representative Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page e The paper may be too damp Try printing with a different batch of paper Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture If background scatter occurs
152. consulted at www samsung com printer go to Support gt Download center and enter your printer MFP name to browse the EuDoC January 1 1995 Council Directive 73 23 EEC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment January 1 1996 Council Directive 89 336 EEC 92 31 EEC approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co Ltd representative EC Certification Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive FAX This Samsung product has been self certified by Samsung for pan European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network PSTN in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries In the event of problems you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd in the first instance The product has been tested against TS 103 021 To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard the European Telecommunication Standards Institute ETSI has issued
153. ct the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help Caution Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canadian Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Industry and Science Canada Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques applicables aux appareils num riques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques ICES 003 dict e par l Industrie et Sciences Canada Fax Branding The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information 1 the date and time of transmission 2 identification of either business business entity or individual sending the message and 3 telephone number of either the sending machine business business entity or in
154. d CD ROM This chapter includes e Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing e Printing Posters e Printing Booklets e Printing on Both Sides of Paper e Change percentage of your document e Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size e Using Watermarks e Using Overlays 21 m l NO f UJ f amp ADH Advanced Printing Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper To print more than one page per sheet the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet l To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 2 From the Basic tab choose Multiple Pages Per Side in the Type drop down list 3 Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet 2 4 6 9 or 16 in the Pages per Side drop down list Select the page order from the Pages Order drop down list if necessary Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet 5 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type Click OK and print the document RO P wD Printing Posters This feature allows you to print a single page document onto 4 9 or 16 she
155. d dirt may accumulate on them resulting in spotty printing To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints handle them carefully To avoid fading do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled curled or have any torn edges When you use the color printed transparency on a beam projector due to toner s characteristics it won t be reflected in colors Caution v e Recommended media Transparency for a Color Laser Printers produced by HP Xerox and 3M e It is not recommended to use paperbacked transparencies such as Xerox 3R91334 which can cause a jam or be scratched Card stock or custom sized materials Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm 3 86 inches wide or 148 mm 5 83 inches long In the software application set margins at least 6 4 mm 0 25 inches away from the edges of the material Preprinted Letterhead must be printed with heat resistant paper ink that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see page 15 1 Letterhead ink must be non flammable and should not adversely affect printer rollers Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage Before you load preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead verify that the ink on the paper is dry
156. d to Remote 5 Enter Remote Fax No Mailbox No and Passcode All these field are filled with information from the receiver gt Ready to Fax UL Group Name cannot ba empty Hanita Fai Mo Delay Sand Priority Send Malas Ma Folling C Piso Mailbox ok JL Cancel 6 Press OK Printing a report after sending a fax You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is successfully completed or not Note The detailed information is available in advanced setup part Page 10 10 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 6 3 Press the Print Report tab gt Report gt Fax Report gt Fax Send Report 4 Press On 7 Paimin Setting Orne Mbox Ermir should be selected General Raport Fax Send paon E o ERIR nes ih heer One Emo K IL Cancel 5 Press OK lt Faxing Optional gt Sending a fax in toll save time You can set the machine to send a fax in toll save time to save a telephone fee If you send a fax after setting this feature fax data will be stored in machine s memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll save time 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 6 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on
157. des of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value Advanced tab fi j Ready to Scan Chee Mailbox Entry should be selected Bak e Original Size Sets the originals to a specific fixed size Page 7 9 e Back Returns to the previous screen 7 2 lt Scanning gt Image tab gt Requesting element list Please wait 2 Advanced Original Type a Color Mode Mono Darkness ed Erase Background Off Scan to Edge oti e _ e Original Type Selects whether the original is text or photo Page 7 9 e Color Mode Adjusts the color options of the scan output If the original is color and you want to scan in color press Color Mode Page 7 9 e Darkness Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output Use left right arrow to adjust the values Page 7 10 e Erase Background Erases backgrounds like paper patterns Page 7 10 e Scan to Edge Scans originals from edge to edge Page 7 10 e Back Returns to the previous screen Note Scan to PC only supports Color Mode menu Output tab i Ready Atleast one condition should be selected as ON Basic Advanced e Quality Adjusts the display quality of the scan output Page 7 10 e Scan Preset Automatically changes some scan options such as file format resolution and more You can adjust options to fit each specific purpose Page 7 10 File Fo
158. distributing toner temperature and humidity Samsung suggests users follow the When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life recommendations to ensure the optimum performance highest quality and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge e White streaks or light printing occurs e The message saying that the estimated toner cartridge life is closed Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions may appear on the display The toner cartridge should remain in its original unopened package until If this happens you can temporarily reestablish print quality by installation If original packaging is not available cover the top opening of redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge In some cases white the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life Do not store on the floor If the toner 1 cartridge is removed from the printer always store the cartridge e Inside the protective bag from the original package 2 e Correct side up in a horizontal position not standing on end e Do not store consumables in Temperature greater than 40C 104F Humidity range less than 20 nor greater than 80 An environm
159. dividual The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment or otherwise materially affect its use or performance the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service Ringer Equivalence Number The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line and is useful for determining whether you have overloaded the line Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls especially ringing when your line is called The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company In some cases a sum of five may not be
160. e DADF is firmly closed The DADF rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative The receiving mode should be set to Fax Make sure that there is paper in the tray Check to see if the display shows any error message If it does clear the problem Make sure that the original is loaded in the DADF or on the scanner glass Check the fax machine you are sending to to see if it can receive your fax The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty A noisy phone line can cause line errors Check your machine by making a copy The toner cartridge may have reached its estimated cartridge life Replace the toner cartridge referring to page 11 4 The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam Check your scan unit for marks and clean it Page 11 2 The other fax machine may be turned off out of paper or cannot answer incoming calls Speak with the other machine operator and ask her him to solve out the problem There may not be enough memory space to store the fax If the display shows the low memory message delete any faxes you no longer need from the memory and then try to store the fax again Please call for service You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting For details about paper settings Page 4 9 Common Windows problems Suggested solutions File in Use message appears during installation General Protection Fault Exce
161. e File Format but several originals are scanned as one file e JPEG Scans original in JPEG format Note The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode 7 11 lt Scanning gt S Basic printing This chapter explains common printing tasks Printing a document Your machine allows you to print from various Windows Macintosh or Linux applications The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use For details about printing see Software section Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler such as the printer group in Windows delete the job as follows 1 2 4 Click the Windows Start menu For Windows 2000 select Settings and then Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Device and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Device and Printers For Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista and 2008 double click your machine For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 right click your printer icon gt context menus gt See what s printing Note If See what s printing item has mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer From the Document menu select Can
162. e OvervieW tccscecmumscacdedletenadacetndendcacutcaeisansecduncedosstehecotidascaedenhtemadesaind assieacacsasdsendesictedsetttinenctntaecedteecieleuceeesncs 1 3 POVON oe E T ee ee ee eet eee 13 Pe le WO aoe cna scecmeeesec E odes cede csesanseesuee cs wen ccepeeueeeaeenumdctedace ct ica sansioneseuseni E ET 1 4 Conirol panel OVENVICW cdesececcceacesdeassecadednascenasicudedaneceoncqeecdacsudixanodsdeecetaasdue lt cempmcantecnndentaedcedadbodasuansunoecnesiieuccbenddencnncee 1 5 Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons 0 0 cccccceeeeeeeceeeecaeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeesseaassseeeeeeeessanaeeeeees 1 6 TOUCH COCH ected cee rss a cet A eS ss tree eae E E E E deneetecessacedoocuacaa 1 6 Machine Setup DUWO zceecs erecta shesect enncctaeqeqscehtee se eadeaceedocdestan ec eee ectnenadececusaeccecaeneeteesseanecccaeceaneenasseseaceon deems seeueeuenecs 1 6 JOD Status DUHOM oso iesice sine cernceedenstianstencesuecsendanderapeatnntiadadinnedengeuersaueneieantunac EERE EERE EEEE EE EREE ENER 1 6 POWO SAVEDI saer ea A ie oh E E EE AE 1 7 POT GU OC ONY araen E E R E A aeececeden een sede dees sune eat 1 7 LIMGSTSTANGInG the Status LED ries cose ii niese osia iniaa ai ri A nra sa AE Eanna K Kaa E AEE N aa EEEN cause dese niii 1 7 S E LLU e SETAE PE E A E A TET EE TETEE AE E EEN A PE A AE A 1 7 KSE IN AO EOE I EE E A E A A EE A EE E ET E E S ET EEE AT E E 1 8 MaS SSIS ae E E E E 1 8 Macnee UPD ean EN E E eee ree 1 9 Jop SUS DOUNON soneran E E R EE
163. e appears If 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel the administrator set the password you have to enter the Py password every time you want to use Admin Setting 2 Select the appropriate item for your occasion Page 3 6 P eH Print Report eee ariditat a UAA Report y Default Settings Contact info Measurements E Timers ix Cea e Machine Status Shows the current machine status e Admin Setting Allows administrator to set up the machine When you press Admin Setting login message pops up Enter password and press OK Factory setting is 1111 Tray Management Shows the currently installed tray and their status You can also change the paper settings for each tray e Usage Page Report You can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type e General tab Sets the basic parameters of the machine such as location date time and more Page 10 2 e Setup tab Sets the values for fax network login and an option to service for enabling the feature listed on the screen Print Report tab Prints configuration or font list and displays a report of machine features Page 10 10 e Back Returns to the previous screen lt Machine status and advanced setup gt z _ e 3 Press the General tab Browsing the machine s status You can browse the machine information and validate some features of the machine General Print Report Device Info Serv
164. e details on a small document l To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 From the Paper tab Select the paper size you want from the Fit to page Select the Size Source and Type in Paper Options Click OK and print the document ul Bm WN Using Watermarks The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document For example you may want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document There are several predefined watermarks that come with the printer and they can be modified or you can add new ones to the list Using an Existing Watermark l To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 2 Click the Advanced tab and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop down list You will see the selected watermark in the preview image 3 Click OK and start printing NOTE The preview image shows how the page will look when it is printed Creating a Watermark l To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 2 From the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears 3 Enter a text message in the Wa
165. e software e When scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Scanning operates propery in Mac OS 10 3 9 or higher and Mac OS 10 4 7 or higher Scanning with network I Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass OR load the document s face up into the ADF or DADF 3 Start Applications and click Image Capture 4 For MAC OS X 10 4 10 5 Click Devices and click Browse Devices For MAC OS X 10 6 Select your device below SHARED Skip to step 7 5 For MAC OS X 10 4 Select your machine in Twain devices option Make sure that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked and click Connect 49 If a warning message appears click Change Port to select port If TWAIN UI appears from the Preference tab click Change Port to select port For MAC OS X 10 5 Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your machine in Bonjour Devices If you want to scan using TWAIN refer to the MAC OS X 10 4 procedure above 6 Set the scan options on this program 7 Scan and save your scanned image NOTE For more information about using Image Capture please refer to the Image Capture s help Use TWAIN compliant softwares to apply more scan options e You can also scan using TWAIN compliant softwares such as Adobe Photoshop Scan process differs according to TWAIN compliant softwares Please refer to the us
166. e to Gray the Quality option is grayed out Scan Preset This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job Press Scan to Server gt the Output tab gt Scan Preset Or Press Scan to Email gt the Options tab gt Scan Preset a ah aed ULH marigi High Ouaity Pria Sumia Sew Sharing and Printing Produces a small sized file for normal quality documents e High Quality Printing Set this option for high quality output with the largest file size Archival Record For the electronic file which is of the smallest file size of the output e OCR Produces scanned output for OCR software You can expect the highest quality images e Simple Scan Used for a simple document with text only The file size of output is small e Custom Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen 7 10 lt Scanning gt File Format You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job Press Scan to Server gt the Output tab gt File Format Or Press Scan to Email gt the Options tab gt File Format Or Press Scan to PC gt the Output tab gt File Format ER o Sangle Page TIFF ee Multi Page TIFF PDF Scans originals in PDF format e Single Page TIFF Scans the originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format and several originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file e Multi Page TIFF Scans originals in TIFF Tagged Imag
167. ears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then cl ick Next Select Printer Port a Select a port that will be used for your printer TCPAP Port C Shared Printer UNC C Add TCP IP Port Advanced Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list Printer Name IP Port Name NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing the installer from Update detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on this PC before continuing with the installation If you click the Advanced button you can search a priter with the SNMP Community Name Default name is public If you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the printer To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button e f you select Add TCP IP Port you can enter Pv4 IPv6 or the Hostname You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any item individually Installing Printer Software in Windows NOTE If your printer is not already connected to the Removing Printer Software computer the following window will appear x
168. eccaseccescncdeauchetosdeaasadcuncessnderedazeudaduiedeeabsadaedeceeoedecipndasdaadseensnsesedsouedeeanunneedsaeedececdenes 7 1 SA OW ce Ahm occ coe ceca ee concn E cee cee oge se ou ee name E se eee cance nmee stot seeeceu neces 7 1 BASIC IAD e oc vnc eet E E pene cess oie ee E EE E E A acto cpiaceeon tenes ARS 7 2 ROVNICE oaren ne ee en ee ee ee eee eee 7 2 WDM SAO escheat peice P eave emia dames E EA to E E tacos palatine sedate E T 7 3 6 610 Speen eerie cree E ee Ree Tee ee ne er ee Pee ee ane mee tee eee 13 User authentication for network SCANNING ccccccsseecccceeeceecceecceeceueeceeseeueceeseueeeceseueeeeseceueceessuaeeeseeesssaaeeeeesaaeeees 7 3 Registering local authorized users ccccccceeeecceeneeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeueeeeeaeeeeecaeaueeeeseaeeeeeeseueeeesaaaeeeseeeesaeeeeesaneeesesages 7 3 Register authorized network users cccccccssseceeccecceueueeeeececauesseecceesceuusecececeesaaucececeesseaeaeeeeesesseassauseeceeeesaaageeeeess 1 3 Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email cc cecceecceeecceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaseeseeeeseeeeess 7 4 Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment ccecccceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeees 7 4 Setting UD an e mail ACCOUN csc ciesaciaceseneceascadnseuceieiancadeneeccedecesinidieteeehedsecaded EEN er aO ANAE EaR PANTEA ANDE Eisai Ea E 7 5 Stormg email Addresses eissii ieie eE ee eE oak REAR REE SES E Ere EE
169. ed solutions Samsung Scan Manager does not work Check your system requirements Samsung Scan Manager works in Window and Macintosh Page 2 2 Fax problems optional Suggested solutions The machine is not Unplug the power cord and plug it in again working there is no Ensure that there is power being supplied to display and the the electrical outlet buttons are not working Check that the phone line is properly connected Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone No dial tone sounds Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly Print a Fax Phone Book Page 6 7 The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly 12 21 lt Troubleshooting gt Suggested solutions The original does not feed into the machine Faxes are not received automatically The machine does not send The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor quality Stretched words appear on an incoming fax There are lines on the originals you sent The machine dials a number but the connection with the other fax machine fails Faxes do not store in memory Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages with a small Strip of text at the top e Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly Check that the original is the right size not too thick or thin Make sure that th
170. eeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeesceeeeeeeeesseseaaeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaaas 4 4 Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray cc ccceseeseeceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeseseeceeeeeeeseesaeseseeeeeceeeeeessesaaaeaaeeeseeeeness 4 6 Es cisne gS A T E E EA E T E TE A TETTE TEE E E ET 4 7 Loading paper in tray 1 optional tray or optional high capacity feeder ceecccccseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeessaeeseeess 4 7 In the multi purpose Nay srce ieissa inea sence ARE ia a AEREE EERE REENEN ERARA EREN E anr ESEE 4 8 Setting the Paper size and tYPE eee eecccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeseeeceeeeeeeeesseaeeessceceeeeeeeseesaeaaasececeeeeeseessaeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 9 5 Copying Understanding the Copy screen ccccccccccecceeceeseesseeeececeeeeeseseeaeeusceeeeeeeeeseseseeaeesseeeeeeeesesessuausaseeeeeeeeeeeesssaaaeaeeess 5 1 BASIC AO cece cate see iseesec E oases enrerne E E E 5 1 POVAN CETA soo conn ene nee mer ne ne oe ce ero E eo een eee ee ee ee ee 5 1 WN MOA asco eS oeec E E as epee E soles ide oe wan nde ae eeea ates eames ied ae ede dense meee sgeeeeaetncataed 5 2 OS OV NO OMI NS feces ciate erent ct set sen ces nctisety 2 ecetspiee seed dae a oat E E bere useeetst ue kocy denselchess oe pacedestoueaecas 5 2 Changing the settings for each COPY ccccccccsssssseeeccceeeeceeseeeeeseseeeceeeeeessaeaeeassseceeeeeeeeessaeaeaeeseeeeeeeessesseseaaseeeeeeeeeeees 5 3 Changing the Size of originals geee ee eee ee 5 3 Reducing Or enlargi
171. elect the printing resolution The higher the setting the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document eColor Mode You can set the color options Setting to Color typically produces the best possible print quality for color documents If you want to print a color document in grayscale select Grayscale Paper Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print This will let you get the best quality printout If you load a different type of print material select the corresponding paper type Printer H F Precete Standard a Copies fl 3 l i Collated Two Sided Fages fs full From 1 to i Paper Size US Letter 1 6 50 by 21 00 inches Orientation if Paper TA Paper Tie Printer Default a EmA meme SAMSUNG T PDE Y l Supplies i Cancel i E FiA A Mac OS 10 5 45 Job Accounting This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data or change the password Printer EF a Presets Standard cs Copies it f j E Collated Tag Shiled Pages Al Fram 1 m l Paper Sige US Letter ial 6 50 by 11 00 inches Orientateon a job Accounting H 1 Group permission Bi User permission User 1D regal Loft b iki Enter Pareword 4 32 Alphanumeric Confirm Password 4 32 Alphanurenrich SAMSUNG pore Supplies Cancel pene A Mac OS
172. ems with all the equipment It is recommended that no other equipment except for a regular telephone share the line with your machine e f your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores e When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers use a non emergency number to advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number e This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines e This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids e You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack USOC RJ 11C Replacing the Fitted Plug for UK Only Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard BS 1363 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse When you change or examine the fuse you must re fit the correct 13 amp fuse You then need to replace the fuse cover lf you have lost the fuse cover do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover Please contact the people from you purchased the machine The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be Suitable However some buildings mainly old ones do not have no
173. en sateen E nn E pee enage lt peas eabseaceeaeeetaoaaee 10 6 AUMAIA 9 Ree ee een nea mene aoe wes ene ee nn ea ae eee a eae mee 10 7 Optional SErviCe A E 10 8 Adjusting th color contrast gases picdscetedscemacsxncancllesicaniASseeiceacdistse onesie aa aa aaa a aaa a AEE Enea aaa n Na 10 8 Document Box Management ccccsccccssseececceneeeccsaeeeeeseaceeeceueeeceeeeeeeseaeeeessaaeeeeeseuseeeseeaeeeseeeessaseesssnseessees 10 10 lial aie DOI oee A A E A E eee 10 10 11 Maintenance Pining a machine VEDOM secreet A E a e EA a A a a eE Eat 11 1 Monitoring the supplies life ee ccccceseecccceeeeeeccesececeeeueeeecsuseeecseeaeeeeccaaeeeecsuaucesscuseeesecaueeeeessuseeessssseeesseseessnsaseees 11 1 Finding ihe serial NUMDET ssresruoscsreireone naenin RAR E SEO E SERRES Eaa OEKE AE OENRE O RENER 11 1 Sending the imaging unit reorder notification cece cccccceceeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeecaeaeeeessseeeeeeeesssasaaseeeeceseeeeesssesaaaaseeeeeeeeees 11 1 Sending the toner reorder notification ee eeeeeeeeeececceeeeeeceeeeeesseeececeeeeesaeaaeseeesceeeeeeeesssaeaeseseeeeeeeeeeeesssaasageeeeeeeeeees 11 2 Checking DOCUMENT BOX scccesciscccccantecdecendsieacedneda2cedddactacnadcebetedetscunctacescccnednddsaddadsinntcadeseedsdbadeatepedeedsdseceeseiasaenacedel 11 2 Cleaning your Machine srecccenadzcees ecsssonsioastecnecedeeoucuisascuneeseneeceeedsinciiensesadesmpectiss ceeieseeeb natn E EEA EEEE ERORE 11 2 Cleaning INe UNS Stee eva cite
174. ent with extreme changes in humidity or temperature Direct sunlight or room light Dusty places Acar for a long period of time An environment where corrosive gases are present An environment with salty air Handling instructions e Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge e Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock 3 e Never manually rotate the drum especially in the reverse direction this can cause internal damage and toner spillage Use of non Samsung and refilled toner cartridge Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic store brand refilled or remanufactured toner cartridges Note Samsungs printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled remanufactured or non Samsung brand toner cartridge Expected cartridge life Estimated cartridge life the life of the toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require The actual print out number may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on operating environment printing interval media type and or media size Turn the machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool Open the side cover Open the front cover Note 11 3 lt Maintenance gt Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it d
175. er s guide of the software e When scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Scanning operates propery in Mac OS 10 3 9 or higher and Mac OS 10 4 7 or higher For MAC OS X 10 3 use TWAIN compliant softwares Using Your Printer with a Macintosh SOFTWARE SECTION NDEX A advanced printing use 21 B booklet printing 22 C canceling scan 31 Color 18 D document print Macintosh 44 Windows 14 double sided printing 23 G Graphics 18 Graphics properties set 18 H help use 20 26 install printer driver Macintosh 42 Windows 5 installing Linux software 34 L Linux driver install 34 printer properties 38 printing 38 scanning 39 M Macintosh driver install 42 uninstall 42 printing 44 scanning 49 setting up the printer 43 MFP driver install Linux 34 N n up printing Macintosh 48 Windows 21 O orientation print 39 Windows 16 overlay create 25 delete 25 print 25 P Paper properties set 16 paper size set print 39 paper source set 39 paper tray set copy 27 paper type set print 39 poster print 22 PostScript driver installing 26 print 50 document 14 fit to page 23 from Macintosh 44 from Windows 14 N up Macintosh 48 Windows 21 overlay 25 poster 24 PRN 14 scaling 23 watermark 24 print resolution 39 printer driver install Linux 34 printer properties Linux 38 printer properties set Macintosh 44
176. er Save Turns off all the fans even for the fuser unit after certain time e Auto Wake The machine automatically wakes up from the power save mode on the time you have set 7 Press OK Setting the default tray and paper You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing job Page 10 2 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 6 4 Press the General tab 5 Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Tray Management 6 Select tray and its options such as paper size and type 7 Press OK Note If the optional tray is not installed the tray options on the screen is grayed out Changing the default settings You can set the default values for copy fax email scan and paper all at once 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 6 4 Press the General tab gt Default Settings gt Default Option 5 Press the function you want to change and change its settings General Print Report Device Info Hear Copy Scan to Server Date amp Time j Del ault Settings Default P Option Fax Honra Vindow Measurements Ti Home Paper Sire y Bak j For example if you want to change the default setting of the brightness amp darkness for a copy job press Cop
177. er fails Setting a Color Standard When you first turn the machine s power on a pop up asking you to set the color standard will appear This is to improve the printouts color quality Follow below steps to set the color standard 1 Turn the machine s power on 2 A pop up message appears asking you to start the setting a color standard Press Start to start setting a color standard Or press Cancel to do it later 3 1 lt Getting Started gt Note e If a message asking you to select a country appears select a country first then the setting a color standard message will appear e If you press Cancel this message will appear again the next time you turn the machine s power on e The machine should be in a ready mode to set the color standard If the machine is in use a pop up informing you a job is in a pending state will appear Press Retry to retry or press Cancel to try it later 3 After a moment a message asking you to print a pattern paper will appear Press Print Pattern printing will start Note There should be a white paper in the tray to print a pattern paper 4 When pattern paper is printed out place the pattern paper on the scanner glass and press Scan Make sure to align the arrow on the pattern paper with the arrow on the coner of the scanner glass 5 When setting a color standard completed message appears press Close Note You can also use Setting Color Standard menu to set the col
178. erences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture 5 Click Scan 8 Using Smart Panel Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the Status of the printer and allows you to customize the printer s settings If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS user Smart Panel is installed automatically when you install the printer software If you are a Linux OS user download Smart Panel from the Samsung website www samsung com printer and install See Installing the SmartPanel on page 35 NOTE e To use this program you need Windows To check for windows operating system s that are compatible with your printer refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide Mac OS X 10 3 or higher Linux To check for Linux systems that are compatible with your printer refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide Internet Explorer version 5 0 or higher for flash animation in HTML Help e If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM Understanding Smart Panel If an error occurs while printing Smart Panel appears automatically showing the error You can also launch Smart Panel manually Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar in Windows or Notification Area in Linux You can also click it on the status bar in Mac OS X Double click this icon in Windows SO 11 09PM Click this icon in Ma
179. eriirriiinii nterin rie EEE E cheno olnnGeradingrdatenGera denna nuance ae O E E dans 14 PAMS CNO arora T AA AA ET E A A E O A E 15 BOSC Va e E E E E E A 16 Pono TaD eaan E A E EEE OE 16 GPDM TAD Kere rran TEAT E E E E E 18 ANNC T e a E E E E E te ren 19 an Ung TaD aoa E E T A EE aoe E 19 Using a favorite SCUUING sirsrisraisoiiiore n E EA SA T EA a 19 SING FCO zerrena E A r a a a a E 20 Chapter 3 ADVANCED PRINTI NG Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing ssssssssrsnesrnnesrrrrnsrrrresrrrenerrrresrrne 21 PUTING FOSTE Ss ta rF IEE A EEE EE AE EE AEE FIE AOSE ne EEES E A AE E EAS 22 PODNO BOORI EO arre EEE E E E E E E E ere ee eee 22 Printing on Both Sides of Paper essssssssrressrrrerrrrnrsrrresrrrrrerrrrnrrrrrerrrresrrrrrsnrrrerrrrrerrrrerrrrrernrne 23 Change percentage of your dOC MENE sisnersurmanen eraa a 23 Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size ccc cece cece cess sees eee eeeeeeeeessaeeeeesaaneeteeggeneeeeags 23 Wis Tave Relies t ga gis g Cane ee ne nr te te ee ee en ee E ee ne et ee 24 Using AN Existing Watermark ccc cece cece cece eee ee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee DDE SEES ESSE ESSE ESS GEESE SES SEEE EE EES 24 Cheating a VV Alera rK srenariciatiaeesenienteusiearserelenienieiarironesssarraiepiawiantaeesiienoretentavecuanrn 24 Editing Watermark avisatateinnnstiantemustinnesnsaneiretrehnsine oti A ARA ieee re RAAEN aude 24 D leting a Watermark waccensagenvonsennrencanui
180. ets of paper for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster size document l To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 2 Click the Basic tab select Poster Printing in the Type drop down list 3 Configure the poster option You can select the page layout from Poster 2x2 Poster 3x3 or Poster 4x4 If you select Poster 2x2 the output will be automatically stretched to cover 4 physical pages AN mp ay iain NEU A 3x3 Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it easier to pasting the sheets together 0 15 inches 4 Q RD pat 4 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type Oo 0 15 inches 5 Click OK and print the document You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together Advanced Printing 22 Printing Booklets This printer feature allows you to print your document on both sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet NOTE If you want to make a booklet you need to print on Letter Legal A4 Us Folio or Oficio sized print media l To change the print settings from your software application access the printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 2 From
181. eypad on the control panel You have to be informed Passcode from sender with the remote fax machine 4 Press OK Polling from a remote Mailbox This option allows you to retrieve poll a fax which is stored in the Mailbox of on the remote machine Before you start polling you must be informed of Mailbox No and Passcode from the sender Page 6 10 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 6 9 lt Faxing Optional gt 2 3 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Mailbox gt Poll from Remote f gt Reach to Fax L f m tt nap Alanna cannot be anmpty Store Send to Rentata Delay Send Priority Send Liedertis Poll tran Renate Felling Lack Fol Fro Mailer Print Ferioli 7 Enter Remote Fax No Mailbox No and Passcode All these field are filled with information from the sender gt Ready to Fax Group Name cannot ba empty Haiiti Fai Mo Dalry Sand Priority Sand Mahen Mia Polling Passola Mailbox ok cance a Note You can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll a fax from the remote machine s Mailbox at certain time within 24 hours Press OK Using Mailbox You can store the original data in Mailbox since you are absent and the receiver need to be retrieve a fax from you This feature allows you to program up to 15 individual Mailbox Before you store the originals the Mailbox must be created Creating Mailbox N O O A W Press Machine Setup on the control panel Se
182. f dots Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots HDD Hard Disk Drive HDD commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk is a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE is an international non profit professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE The term 1284 B refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral for example a printer Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols network connectivity and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization s information or operations with its employees Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service the internal website IP address An Internet Protocol IP address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard IPM The Images Per Minute IPM is a way of measuring the speed of a printer An IPM rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute IPP The
183. feature Speaker Volume This controls the sound when a fax actually starts to transfer data If this option is On the machine sounds from a fax starts until a fax finishes With Comm the machine sounds only until the communication is succeeded No sound with Off option 10 5 lt Machine status and advanced setup gt ee E Prefix Dial This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to five digits This number will be dialed before any automatic number is dialed User may set this to access a PABX example 9 or area code number example 02 Junk Fax Setup The machine does not accept faxes sent from remote stations if their numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax numbers You can enter a maximum of 10 junk fax numbers Press Junk Fax Setup and Edit then enter the fax numer If you have set Caller ID enabled you can browse the last received fax numbers and select a fax number from the list Ring Volume This feature adjusts the ring volume When you select Off the machine does not ring Dial Tone When you press On Hook Dial to send a fax Volume you can hear a specific tone To adjust the tone volume you can use this feature Mailbox Setup e Document Policy You can set the document stored in Mailbox to delete or retain documents after Select On of each option to delete Off to remain the data Mail Configuration You can create edit or delete Mailbox Enter Mailbox ID Mailbox Name Mailbo
184. fferent number use left right arrows e Phone No Enter a fax numbers only the numbers with the area code if necessary e Email Enter an email address Press OK Storing Group fax numbers Group No 1 2 Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Group Press New Press the input area in Group Name then the keyboard pops up enter the name 7 Select Speed No with left right arrows LA Speed No os gt KCE e Group Name Enters the group name e Speed No Is automatically filled with the first free number If you want to assign to a different number use left right arrows Press OK Select an entry from Individual List and press Add Repeat this step until you added entries you need Epy me _ oroup amp Indradi can nol be present together iraun Edit AG it j A incivichial Lisi m Heyl asi 24 Della 12345 23 Smago P5 2 Oona 71 Germany 17345 wo 20 Panel 145 k Make sure the selected Individual List is copied to the left pane Group list Press OK to save the numbers Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web Service You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer using SyncThru Web Service 1 2 Open the web browser in your computer Enter IP address of your machine then SyncThru Web Service shows Example http 123 123 123 123 Press Machine Settings gt Fax Setup gt Fax Phone Book Select Speed Dial Individual Note
185. figured Individual Address Book 3 Click Machine Settings gt E mail Setup gt Group Address Book Then the screen shows Group Address Book on the right side 4 Click Add 5 Select the Group number and enter Group Name 6 Select email addresses by clicking the check boxes 7 Click Apply 8 Check if the email addresses are correctly stored and listed on your machine by pressing Group Global Email addresses which are stored in Global in your machine are processed by the LDAP server 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 7 5 lt Scanning gt 4 Click Machine Settings gt LDAP Server Setup Then the LDAP Server screen shows on the right side 5 Enter IP Address or Host Name or Host Name and LDAP server and Port 6 Enter optional information 7 Click Apply Note The LDAP server administrator must store the email address data The method of storing is varies depending on the server and the operating systems Entering email addresses by the address book Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address book you can simply enter email addresses 1 Press To Cc or Bec tab from the Scan to Email 2 Press Address Book 3 Select Individual Local Group Local or Global 4 Check the name of the recipient If you cannot find the recipient you want press Sea
186. finisher cover Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit After installing the Fax kit you have to set up the machine in order to use this function 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 6 4 Press the General tab 5 Press the Country Change the country then some the values for fax and paper size will be changed automatically for your country 14 3 lt Installing accessories gt 1 5 Specifications This chapter includes e General specifications e Printer specifications e Copier specifications e Scanner specifications e Facsimile specifications optional General specifications en eee DADF Capacity Up to 100 sheets 75 g m 20 Ib bond DADF document Width size 69 2 7 inches to 216 8 5 inches mm Length 145 5 7 inches to 356 14 0 inches mm Paper input Tray 1 capacity 500 multi page for plain paper 80 g m 20 Ib 75 g m bond 520 sheets Multi purpose tray 100 multi page for plain paper 80 g m 20 Ib bond Optional tray 2 3 500 multi page for plain paper 80 g m 20 Ib 75 g m bond 520 sheets Optional High capacity tray 1 950 multi page for plain paper 80 g m 20 Ib 75 g m bond 2 100 sheets For details about paper input capacity see page 4 3 Paper output Face down 500 sheets 75 g m 20 Ib bond capacity e Optional Stacker 50
187. fter the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test page appears If you choose to print a test page select the checkbox and click Next Otherwise just click Next and skip to step 9 8 Ifthe test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it Installing Printer Software in Windows 9 To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung select the checkbox and click Finish You are now sent to the Samsung web site Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership Necccsenecccssnescceseecccsscccsscnseceseesscssenseeed Installing Software for Network Printing When you connect your printer to a network you must first configure the TCP IP settings for the printer After you have assigned and verified the TCP IP settings you are ready to install the software on each computer on the network You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method Typical I nstallation This is recommended for most users All components necessary for printer operations will be installed l Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on For details about connecting to the network
188. fuser causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with a TWAIN compliant program a scan can be initiated from within the program an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention UNC is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products The format of a UNC path is lt servername gt lt sharename gt lt Additional directory gt URL Uniform Resource Locator URL is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located USB Universal Serial Bus USB is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum Inc to connect computers and peripherals Unlike the parallel port USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna Italy in 1282 they have been used by papermakers to identify their product and also on postage stamps currency and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting WIA Windows Imaging Architecture WIA is an imaging architect
189. g Finding the serial number If you want to check your serial number from the screen follow the next steps 1 PressMachine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Machine Status gt the Machine Info tab gt Machine Details Sending the imaging unit reorder notification You can set the machine to alert you that the life of the imaging unit is almost over and needs to be reordered 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the General tab gt Supplies Management gt Imaging Unit Reorder Notification 4 Press Imaging Unit Low Alert to enable this option on and press Imaging Unit Low Alert Level to set the remained life level 5 Press OK 11 1 lt Maintenance gt Sending the toner reorder notification You can set the machine to alert you that the toner cartridge needs to be reordered 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the General tab gt Supplies Management gt Toner Cartridge Reorder Notification 4 Press Toner Low Alert to enable this option on and press Toner Low Alert Level to set the remained life level 5 Press OK Checking Document Box The machine shows the document box list of the print or fax job Press Document Box on the Main screen If the screen displays an other menu
190. ge options that are used when printing images files such as color options image size or image position Device allows you to set the print resolution paper source and destination 5 Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window 6 Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing 7 The Printing window appears allowing you to monitor the Status of your print job To abort the current job click Cancel Printing Files You can print many different types of files on the Samsung machine device using the standard CUPS way directly from the command line interface The CUPS Ipr utility allows you do that But the drivers package replaces the standard Ipr tool by a much more user friendly LPR GUI program To print any document file l Type lpr lt file_ name gt from the Linux shell command line and press Enter The LPR GUI window appears When you type only lpr and press Enter the Select file s to print window appears first J ust select any files you want to print and click Open 2 Inthe LPR GUI window select your printer from the list and change the printer and print job properties For details about the properties window see page 38 3 Click OK to start printing 39 Using Your Printer in Linux Scanning a Document You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window 1 2 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop Click the button to switc
191. ging print job parameters via LPR GUI for example while a print job is in progress Known versions of CUPS server cut off the print jobs whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning Since Unified Linux Driver locks port while printing the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and therefore unavailable for subsequent print jobs If this situation occurred try to release the port 12 24 lt Troubleshooting gt Possible Cause and Solution Some color images come out all black Some color images come out in unexpected color The machine does not print whole pages and its output is half page printed This is a known bug in Ghostscript until GNU Ghostscript version 7 05 when the base color space of the document Is indexed color space and it is converted through CIE color space Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 7 06 or later You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www ghostscript com This is a known bug in Ghostscript until GNU Ghostscript version 7 xx when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB color space and it is converted through CIE color space Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 8 xx or later
192. gram from http solution samsungprinter com e SyncThru Web Service Web server embedded on your network print server which allows you to Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments Customize email settings and set up address book for scanning to email Customize server settings and set up address book for scanning to the FTP or SMB servers Customize printer copy and fax settings e SetIP Utility program allowing you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP IP protocol You can only use IPv4 setting for Set IP See page 3 4 for Using the SetIP program Installing the software You have to install the machine software for printing and scanning The software includes drivers applications and other user friendly programs Note e The following procedure is for when the machine is being used as a network machine If you want to connect a machine with a USB cable refer to Software section e The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating system The procedure and popup window which appears during the installation may differ depending on the operating system the printer feature or the interface in use See Software section Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed Page 3 2 All applications should be closed on your computer before beginning installation Insert the
193. h to Scanners Configuration Select the scanner on the list Unified Driver Configurator Scanners configuration About Help CIEI Click your scanner Selected scanner Vendor Model Type Exit BLECTAONICS When you have only one MFP device and it is connected to the computer and turned on your scanner appears on the list and is automatically selected If you have two or more scanners attached to your computer you can select any scanner to work at any time For example while acquisition is in progress on the first scanner you may select the second scanner set the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously Click Properties Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF Automatic Document Feeder or face down on the document glass Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Preview Pane i Scanner Properties Color Composition Color 16 Million Colors e Format k 4 210x297 mm kA Drag the pointer to Document Source auto m set the image area to be scanned Job Type Standard Job IE ls inte ees aang Default Press F1 for Help 7 Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections el mage Quality allows you to select the color
194. hange the printer and print job properties versa while in use you must re configure the printer port i P amp clx8385 Properties x in this tab l l General Text Graphics Advanced Driver allows you to view or select another printer PEET driver By clicking Options you can set the default Paper Size Letter 4 Paper Type Printer Detautt device options Paper Orientation Duplex Double Sided Printing eJobs shows the list of print jobs Click Cancel job to no D Con a cancel the selected job and select the Show completed I Reverse vy Short Edge Tablet jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list 7 Banners Pages per Side N Up eClasses shows the class that your printer is in Click Start None s amp Normat 1 Up Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or End _None v 2u click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the aii selected class 4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties Window Help Apply OK Cancel 1 38 Using Your Printer in Linux The following four tabs display at the top of the window eGeneral allows you to change the paper size the paper type and the orientation of the documents enables the duplex feature adds start and end banners and changes the number of pages per sheet eText allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options such as spacing or columns Graphics allows you to set ima
195. he background is Scan to Edge You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is Usually the machine scans a page except edges which means the margin especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray But if you scan and sent it right away via the network as the file the machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals Press Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Scan to Edge Or press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Scan to Edge Select On and press OK 9 4 lt Using USB flash memory gt Quality You can use this option to produce a high quality document Higher quality you select a larger file size you get Press Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt Quality Or press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt Quality Best Normal O Draft Note The Quality cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode Scan Preset This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job Press Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt Scan Preset Or press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt Scan Preset Shane ard OR see ae High Quit Primin 1 Senile Scan Ache Fiasco Casto e Sharing and Printing Produces a small sized file for normal quality documents e High Quality Printing Set this option for high quality output with the largest file size Archival Record For the electronic file which
196. he cartridge Page 11 3 Message Staple cartridge is empty Replace it Staple cartridge is not installed Install it in finisher System error zzz Please turn off then on This IP address conflicts with an IP address already in use Check it Too much paper in finisher stacker Remove printed paper Too much paper in output bin tray Remove printed paper Transfer belt is not valid for this machine Check user s guide Prepare new transfer belt unit Waste tank is full Replace it The staple cartridge is not installed There is a problem in the system operation The IP address is used in other place elsewhere The stacker is full of printouts The printed papers are full on the output tray Meaning Suggested solutions Stapler is run out Order Staple Cartridge Page 13 2 And replace it Page 14 2 Install the staple cartridge following the steps explained on the back of the finisher door Page 14 2 If you want to continue the print job and disregard of this error message go to Admin Setting to adjust the option Page 10 2 Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Check the IP address or obtain a new IP address Remove printouts from the stacker Remove printed outs from the output tray The transfer belt of the machine is not for your machine Install the a Samsung genu
197. he optional tray 2 Please refer to the next method for other optional trays since the method is same as the tray 2 1 Open the outer cover in tray 2 3 Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown To avoid tearing the paper pull it out gently and slowly If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see any paper in this area stop and go to step 4 4 Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the machine If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to step 3 5 Remove the paper in the direction shown To avoid tearing the paper pull it out gently and slowly 6 Insert the paper tray and close the two covers 12 5 lt Troubleshooting gt 4 Pull out the optional high capacity feeder In the optional high capacity feeder Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the machine 5 Open the outer cover of the high capacity feeder 1 A S V NANN AN PN N NNN 2 Open the inner cover of the high capacity feeder 6 Remove the paper in the direction shown Pull it out gently and slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper in the direction shown pulling gently and slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper J 3 Pull the jammed paper out or if the paper is stuck stop
198. hine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 5 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Server Setting gt Send Forward Press On Press OK Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server Note If Forward to Email Setting is on this option will be grayed out The server setting must be done in SyncThru Web Service prior to this option on Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 5 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Server Setting gt Receive Forward Press Forward Press OK Setting up the end fax tone The end fax tone that sounds to indicate that the fax has been received can be turned on or off 1 2 N OO Cn FB W Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 6 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side Press Fax Ending Sound Press On Press OK Setting up receiving faxes in color This function allows you to recieve faxes in color 1 N O OFF A Q Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting When the login message
199. ht the machine The warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after their lifespan Managing your machine from the website If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP IP network parameters correctly you can manage the machine via Samsung s SyncThru Web Service an embedded web server Use SyncThru Web Service to e View the device information and check its current status e Change TCP IP parameters and set up other network parameters e Change the printer properties e Set the machine to send email notifications and update you on the machine s status e Get support for using the machine To access SyncThru Web Service 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows 2 Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go Your machine s embedded website opens 11 9 lt Maintenance gt 1 2 Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information on what to do if you encounter a problem This chapter includes Tips for avoiding paper jams Clearing document jams Clearing paper jams Understanding display messages Solving other problems Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct media types most paper jams can be avoided When a paper jam occurs follow the steps outlined on page 12 3 Follow the procedure on page 4 7 Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned cor
200. hts of paper e Do not load booklets pamphlets transparencies or documents having other unusual characteristics 4 1 lt Loading originals and print media gt To load an original into the DADF 1 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading originals 2 Load the originals face up into the DADF Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray Caution Dust on the DADF glass may cause black streaks on the printout Always keep it clean Selecting print media You can print on a variety of print media such as plain paper envelopes labels and transparencies Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user s guide may cause the following problems e Poor print quality e Increased paper jams e Premature wear on the machine Properties such as weight composition grain and moisture content are important factors that affect the machine s performance and the output quality When you choose print materials consider the following e The type size and weight of the print media for your machine are described later in this section e Desired outcome The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project Brightness Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper more vibra
201. i is Printer Features Feature Sets Back Cower a Back Cover Gption No Covers E Lafi b i k Back Cover Source None a Back Cover Type None 4 7 C POF Sup poles Cancel Prine AMac OS 10 5 Back Cover Option Allows you to choose the option for printing a back cover page You can choose to print the back cover blank preprinted 1 sided printed or 2 sided printed Back Cover Source Allows you to choose the paper source for the back cover Back Cover Type Allows you to choose the paper type for the back cover Front and Back Cover Option Printer a Pracete Standard nf Copies 1 fl Collated C Two Sided Fages all From 1 wil Paper Size UG Letter a 6 50 by 110 inches Crientahon G IQ Printer Features aH Feature Sets Front and Back Cover E Front and fack Cover Option No Covers HH Lote Front and Rack Cower Source Hone H Front and Back Cover Type None i 7 C PFe Supplies Canel Prine AMac OS 10 5 eFront and Back Cover Option Allows you to choose the option for printing a front and back cover page You can choose to print the front and back cover blank preprinted 1 sided printed or 2 sided printed eFront and Back Cover Source Allows you to choose the paper source for the front and back cover eFront and Back Cover Type Allows you to choose the paper type for the front and back cover 47 Transparency Seperator Printer
202. ice Center 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel m Ragieration 2 Press Machine Status gt the Machine Info tab Default Settings groats Measurements o Device Info The sub options available are Service Center Registration and Contact Info You may enter information on service center and purchasing point Date amp Time You can set the date and time Page 3 6 Default Settings e Default Window Set the first window that will appear on the display screen after turning on the machine or waking up from the Power Save For example if you select Fax as a default window the first window will be the Basic tab of the Fax feature In case you want to show ID Copy as a default window e Machine Details This option shows the customer support information on the email address and the phone number you stored from Admin Setting Also you can check the machine s serial number or the hardware and software information specification Print Report You can print various helpful and informative reports such as System Report Fax Report and Scan Report Page 11 1 you need to enable this feature in Default Option previously Default Option Changes all the default values for copying faxing emailing scanning and paper at once Page page 3 7 Home Allows user to arrange each function in the display screen Tray Status The screen shows the trays installed on your machine and their current configurations Select the tra
203. ided originals Page 5 7 e Covers Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken from a different tray Page 5 8 e Transparencies Adds a blank or printed divider between transparencies within a set Page 5 8 e WaterMark Prints an image with the added watermark Page 5 8 e Overlay Prints an image with the image previously stored in your machine Page 5 8 e Auto Crop Prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank parts like the margin Page 5 8 e Multi Bin Allows you to select the output mode Page 5 9 5 1 lt Copying gt Image tab j Ready To Copy Copies 001 aee f f gs s 2 3 s e Erase Edge Allows you to erase punch holes staple marks and fold creases along any of the four documents edges Page 5 9 e Erase Background Prints an image with no background Page 5 10 e Margin Shift Creates a binding edge for the document Page 5 10 e Scan Enhance Use this feature for the better quality of copy output Page 5 10 e Adjust Backside Image Allows you to copy and image and remove the back side image shown through Page 5 10 Copying originals This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals 1 Press Copy from the Main screen 2 Place originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Original Size
204. ies 13 1 original size copying 5 3 scanning 7 9 9 3 original type copying 5 5 faxing 6 7 scanning 7 9 9 4 originals 4 1 clearing jam 12 1 loading in the DADF 4 1 loading on the scanner glass 4 1 output options 10 3 P page numbering in copying 10 4 paper changing the size 4 7 clearing jam 12 3 loading in the multi purpose tray 4 8 loading in the optional tray 4 7 loading in the tray1 4 7 paper feeding problems 12 15 setting the paper size of the tray 4 9 phonebook fax 6 7 fax phonebook from SyncThru Web Ser vice 6 8 polling deleting the polling document 6 9 polling a remote fax 6 9 polling from remote Mailbox 6 9 printing the polling document 6 9 storing the originals for polling 6 9 PostScript driver features 2 2 problems 12 23 Power Save 3 6 Power Saver 1 5 1 7 hardware 1 5 1 7 using power save mode 3 6 10 3 print media guidelines 4 4 media sizes 4 4 selecting print media 4 2 specification 4 3 print report accounting reports 10 10 configuration report 10 11 e mail confirmation report 10 11 fax report 10 11 11 1 from the website 11 9 network auth log report 10 10 network configuration 10 10 PCL font list 10 10 PS3 font list 10 10 scan report 11 1 scan to server confirmation 10 11 Schedule jobs report 10 10 Supplies information 10 10 system report 11 1 usage page report 10 10 Printer software CD 2 1 printing 8 1 problem solving 12 16 USB memory 9 6 problems copying 12 20 display
205. ilbox 2 Bin Finisher a Printing on both sides of paper For ordering information for optionals Page 13 1 1 2 lt Introduction gt Machine overview These are the main components of your machine Front view N A AAN AAN SAN DI X y WN ZA N AENEAN N X Ke A fi IREN ANY oN NW NL VII is a mark for the optional device e The symbol Stand 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 DADF cover 1 CCD Lock DADF document width guides DADF document input tray 2 3 4 Output support Multi purpose tray extension DADF document output tray Multi purpose tray paper width guides Scanner lid Scanner glass Control panel 6 7 Image transfer unit Side cover Toner cartridge Front cover 8 9 Imaging unit Multi purpose tray Waste toner container Tray 1 10 11 Optional tray lt Introduction gt 1 3 Rear view e The symbol is a mark for the optional device 1 Finisher Stacker amp Stapler 7 USB port 2 Finisher output tray Stacker amp Stapler 8 Network port 3 Finisher cover Stacker amp Stapler 9 Dummy for FDI Foreign Device Interface 4 USB memory port 10 15 pin Finisher connection Stacker amp Stapler 5 Extension telephone socket EXT 11 Power switch 6 Telephone line socket LINE 12 Power receptacle 1 4 lt Introduct
206. ile name NOTE If you type in only the file name the file is automatically saved in My Documents Basic Printing 15 Printer Settings You can use the printer properties window which allows you to access all of the printer options you need when using your printer When the printer properties are displayed you can review and change the settings needed for your print job Your printer properties window may differ depending on your operating system This Software User s Guide shows the Properties window for Windows XP Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use If you access printer properties through the Printers folder you can view additional Windows based tabs refer to your Windows User s Guide NOTE e Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver Change all print settings available in the software application first and change any remaining settings using the printer driver e The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current program To make your changes permanent make them in the Printers folder e The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help 1 Click the Windows Start button 2 Select Printers and Faxes 3 Select your printer driver icon 4 Right click on the printer drive
207. in Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 6 4 Press the General tab 5 Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Language 6 Select the desired language 7 Press OK Setting job timeout When there is no input for a certain period of time the machine exits the current location You can set the amount of time the machine will wait 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting oo When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 6 Press the General tab Press Timers Select System Timeout Select On Select a duration using left right arrows Press OK O O N O OO A Using power saving feature The machine provides power saving features 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 6 4 Press the General tab 5 Press down arrow to switch the screen press Power Saver 3 6 lt Getting Started gt 6 Select appropriate option and time General Prini Repor l argpuage Low Povrer Power Saver ee Tray Managervant se Power Sire Palpene Aabo Wika Duim Oy laos i ka Bak e Low Power Save Keeps the temperature of the fuser unit under 100 C and turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan for the fuser unit e Pow
208. in the multi purpose tray 100 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib paper in the tray1 35 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib in the multi purpose tray 100 sheets of paper in the tray1 10 sheets of paper in the multi purpose tray 250 sheets of paper in the tray 50 sheets of paper in the multi purpose tray 1250 sheets of paper in the high capacity feeder 4 3 lt Loading originals and print media gt Guidelines for special print media Envelopes e Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes When selecting envelopes consider the following factors Media sizes supported in each mode Letter A4 Legal Folio Tray 1 Oficio Executive ISO Optional tray Copy mode Single side printing Duplex printing B5 A5 All sizes supported by the machine Letter A4 Legal Folio Oficio JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 Multi purpose tray High capacity feeder Tray 1 Optional tray Multi purpose tray High capacity feeder Tray 1 Optional tray Multi purpose tray Fax mode Statement High capacity feeder Letter A4 Legal Ttray 1 Optional tray High capacity feeder a 60 to 120 g m 16 to 32 Ib bond only b Only the optional fax kit is installed Guidelines for selecting and storing print media When selecting or loading paper envelopes or other print materials keep these guidelines in mind Always use print media that conform with the specifications listed on
209. inals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server e Changing the scan feature settings Understanding the Scan screen To use the scanning feature press Scan to Email Scan to Server or Scan to PC on the Main screen If the screen displays an other menu press to go to the Main screen Fean bo Email Scan to Server Soon bo Po Taner info Note If the message asking Auth ID and Password it means the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web Service Page 11 9 e Scan to Email Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination by email Page 7 4 e Scan to Server Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination with SMB and FTP Page 7 7 e Scan to PC Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination with the Samsung Network Scan Manager program Page 7 6 Scan to Email From Detautt The serxder s emad address Enter your emal address Your emal address yall be shown in the recipient s mai as a sender Near e From Sender s email address e To Cc Bcc Recipients addresses Cc is for copies to an additional recipient and Bcc is same as Cc but without their name being displayed in the email Address Book Inputs the recipient s address just by pressing stored addresses If you press Search you can search the recipient s address If you press Detail you can see the detailed information of selected recipient If you want to edit or delete a recipient pre
210. ine part designed for your machine The life of the transfer belt expires totally Replace the part with a new one Call for service The life span of the waste toner container has expired and the printer will stop printing until a new waste toner container is placed into the printer Replace a waste toner container with a Samsung genuine waste toner container Page 11 8 12 14 lt Troubleshooting gt OE Solving other problems USE AUXILIARY The credit is not Insert credit into the ACCESS enough to access Foreign Device The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the the job according to recommended solutions Follow the suggested solutions until the Foreign Device problem is corrected If the problem persists please call for service Touch screen problem Suggested solutions The touch screen Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen does not show e Turn the machine off and turn it on again If anything the problem persists please call for service Paper feeding problems Suggested solutions Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam Page 12 3 during printing Paper sticks e Ensure that there is not too much paper in the together tray The tray can hold up to 520 sheets of paper depending on the thickness of the paper Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper Page 4 3 Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper H
211. ing a Document When you print with a Macintosh you need to check the printer software setting in each application you use Follow these steps to print from a Macintosh w l Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup Document Setup in some applications 3 Choose your paper size orientation scaling and other options and click OK Settings Page Attributes KA Format for H Make sure that your Paper size US Letter printer is selected 21 59 cm eeeEeE Orientation Scale 100 Cancel Foe A Mac OS 10 3 4 Open the File menu and click Print 5 Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print 6 Click Print when you finish setting the options 44 Changing Printer Settings You can use advanced printing features when using your printer From your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu The printer name which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the printer in use Except for the name the composition of the printer properties window is similar NOTE The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh OS version Layout The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper Select Layout from the Presets drop down list to access the foll
212. ing the touch screen and useful buttons e Understanding the Status LED e Menu map Note Some features are optional Please check the specifications sections Page 15 1 Special features Your new machine is equipped with special features Print with excellent quality and speed e You can print in full range of colors using yellow magenta cyan and black to 4 e You can print with a resolution of up to 9 600 x 600 dpi e effective output 600 x 600 x 4 dpi See Software 233333 section Your machine prints A4 sized paper at up to 38 ppm and letter sized paper at up to 40 ppm For duplex printing your machine prints A4 sized paper at up to 33 ppm and letter sized paper at up to 35 ppm Handle different paper options with flexibility A e The multi purpose tray supports letterhead envelopes labels transparencies custom sized media postcards and heavy paper The multi purpose tray holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper e The 520 sheet tray 1 and 520 sheet optional tray support plain paper in various sizes e The 2 100 sheet optional high tray support plain paper in various sizes Create professional documents e Print watermarks You can customize your documents with words such as Confidential See Software O section e Print posters The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster See Sof
213. inter cable is not defective Switch the cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the cable Check that the scanner is configured correctly Check scan setting in the SmarThru Configuration or the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port Check if the machine is printing received data If so scan the document after the received data has been printed Graphics are scanned more slowly than text Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting It will help to increase the speed For details about how to set BIOS refer to your computer user s guide set to the H W mode you want Port is being used by another program Port is Disabled Scanner is busy receiving or printing data Restart your computer and try again The printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on then restart your computer The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off When the current job is completed try again Invalid handle Scanning has failed Samsung Scan Manager Problem Condition Suggest
214. ion gt Control panel overview COC 2 0 Machine Setup Leads you to the machine setup and 8 On Hook Dial Engages the telephone line advanced settings Page 10 1 Job Status Shows the jobs currently running queued jobs 9 Interrupt Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job or completed jobs Status Shows the status of your machine Page 1 7 10 Clear All Reverts the current settings to the default values Display screen Displays the current machine status and 11 Power Saver Sends the machine into the power saver prompts during an operation You can set menus easily mode You can also turn the power on and off with this using the touch screen button Page 3 6 Numeric keypad Dials fax number and enters the number 12 Stop Stops an operation at any time The pop up window value for document copies or other options appears on the screen showing the current job that the user can stop or resume Clear Deletes characters in the edit area 13 Start Starts a job Redial Pause In standby mode redials the last number or in edit mode inserts a pause into a fax number Caution When you use the touch screen use your finger only The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or anything else 1 5 lt Introduction gt Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons einen ope tap L When you press Machine Setup button you can browse current Touch screen machine settings or change
215. ired Cookor Network Set hmeda Guston Cotor Lone affair sat Analog F ax Sean To SMB mige i o Arari Authentication Aito Cuor Optional S Scan to Emal Scan ToFTP LJ Pegs trivia Toner Density This item allows you to calibrate toner density for the Enables or disables the Copy menu from the Calibration best possible color print quality main screen Analog Fax After installing the fax kit select this option Enable to use this machine as a fax machine Enables or disables the Scan to Email menu from the scan screen Scan to PC Set Enable to activate the scanning and sending it via network Scan to SMB Enables or disables the Scan to SMB option from the scan screen Custom Color This item allows you to adjust contrast color by color CMYK Allows you to adjust the contrast of the toner in each toner cartridge e Default Optimizes colors automatically e Manual Adjust Allows you to manually adjust the color contrast for each cartridge Note You should use the Default setting for best color quality Scan to FTP Enables or disables the Scan to FTP option from the scan screen On Demand You can set the machine to delete previous job Image Overwrite information on HDD as you store new job information Set this option to Enable go to the General tab gt On Demand Overwrite press Start in the display to start the overwriting job Immediatelmage If you select Enable the machine renews the Overwrite HDD memory when
216. ith your machine select it as your TWAIN source in the application you use The basic scanning process involves a number of steps l Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass 3 Open an application such as Photoshop 4 Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options 5 Scan and save your scanned image NOTE You need to follow the program s instructions for acquiring an image Please refer to the user s guide of the application Scanning Using the WIA Driver Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition WIA driver for scanning images WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and works with digital cameras and scanners Unlike the TWAIN driver the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images without using additional software NOTE The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with USB port except on Windows 2000 Windows XP Server 2003 1 Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass From the Start menu select Settings Control Panel Scanners and Cameras Double click your scanner driver icon The Scanner and Camera Wizard appears Click Next Set the option in Choose scanning preferences window and click Preview
217. iver is installed on your computer For details about installing the PS printer driver see Software section 2 Click the Windows Start menu 3 For Windows 2000 select Settings and then Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers 2 Pull the stapler unit out For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 4 Select the Samsung CLX 8540 Series PS printer Click the right mouse button on the machine icon and select Properties For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printer properties Note If Printer properties item has mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer 5 Select Device Settings l 3 Lift the empty staple cartridge from the stapler unit 6 select the Installable Options section and set the necessary options 7 Click OK Replacing the Stapler When the stapler is completely empty the message for installing the staple cartridge appears on the display screen 4 Unpack the new staple cartridge 5 Place the staple cartridge back into the stapler unit 14 2 lt Installing accessories gt 6 Slide the stapler unit in until it locks in place 7 Close the
218. job If you want to change the default setting on document settings refer to Admin Setting gt General tab gt Default Settings Page 10 2 Duplex This function is especially intended for two sided originals You can select whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper Load the originals onto the DADF to use this function Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Duplex Use left right arrows to toggle the value e 1 Sided Is for the originals that are printed on one side only e 2 Sided Is for the originals that are printed on both sides Resolution Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received document Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Resolution Use left right arrows to toggle the values Resolution 4f Standard joe e Standard Usually recommended for originals with text This option will reduce the transmission time e Fine Recommended for the originals containing with small characters thin lines or text that was printed using a dot matrix printer e Super Fine Recommended for originals containing with extremely fine detail this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also supports a Super Fine resolution Note For memory transmission Super Fine mode is not available The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine Original Type You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a document being scanned Press Fax gt the
219. l printer idle Model URI el You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help 3 After changing the configurations click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator Using Your Printer in Linux 36 Printers Configuration Printers configuration has the two tabs Printers and Classes Printers Tab You can see the current system s printer configuration by clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window 4 by Unified Driver Configurator r Printers configuration Switches to Printer configuration Remove Printer ALC F Shows all of the aaa installed printer shows the status m Selected printer model name and etic URI of your printer URI You can use the following printer control buttons e Refresh renews the available printers list e Add Printer allows you to add a new printer e Remove Printer removes the selected printer e Set as Default sets the current printer as a default printer e Stop Start stops starts the printer e Test allows you to print a test page to check if the machine is working properly e Properties allows you to view and change the printer properties For details see page 38 Classes Tab The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes Unified Driver Configurator Printers configuration Printers Classes Retresh Add C
220. lass Remove Class Set as Default Shows all of the printer classes Shows the status of the class and the number of Selected dass 5 5 Sinte idle printers in the class Printers in thass 2 grr ELECTRONICS e Refresh Renews the classes list e Add Class Allows you to add a new printer class e Remove Class Removes the selected printer class Scanners Configuration In this window you can monitor the activity of scanner devices view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices change device properties and scan images Unified Driver Configurator m Scanners configuration Switches to Scanners configuration Shows all of the installed scanners shows the vendor m Selected scanner model name and type Vendor Model of your scanner ee z RECTAONICS e Properties Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a document See page 39 Using Your Printer in Linux 37 Ports Configuration In this window you can view the list of available ports check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy state when its owner is terminated for any reason Unified Driver Configurator m Port configuration Clergge devimfpO devimfpl devimfp2 idevimfp3 SERERE C 5 fdevinfpS fdevimfp6 fdevimfn fdevimfps devimfpS Help sevme te Shows all of the available ports
221. lect Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter the password and press OK Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press the down arrow to scroll down if necessary Press Mailbox Setup Press Mailbox Configuration Then the screen displays Mailbox List 7 10 11 12 13 Select a Mailbox on the Mailbox List gt Admin Setting ta Group Name cannot be empty Genoa Copy Setup Aio Miaa List b _ Edit Malhas 1 MB ax Setup MBZ Poet Sahii Delete Mallow q MES Authentication 4 MIB 5 MES Optional Serice 6 MBE k Press Edit Mailbox Admin Setting 2 ne Mailbox Entire should be selected PrntjAHeport General Copy Setup Khibox D Monikaitiorn Far Sotip Aletwork Sac f laboos Mare Aart henrvtneat oon Mailbox Ontional Service Passoods x ok caes Press Mailbox ID and enter ID with number keypad on the control panel Up to 20 numbers you can enter Enter Mailbox Name with the pop up keyboard It can be either alphabet or number up to 20 digits Enter Mailbox Passcode with the numeric keypad on the control panel Note If you set Mailbox Passcode to number 0000 then the machine does not ask passcode for using Mailbox such as storing deleting printing receiving Set Notification option to On if you want to be notified when a fax is received into Mailbox Press OK Storing originals in Mailbox Since you created the mailbox you can store o
222. lick Add Using Your Printer with a Macintosh 43 For a USB connected 1 2 Follow the instructions on Installing Software on page 42 to install the PPD file on your computer Open the Applications folder Utilities and Print Setup Utility e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 open System Preferences from the Applications folder and click Printer amp Fax Click Add on the Printer List e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 press the icon then a display window will pop up For MAC OS 10 3 select the USB tab e For MAC OS 10 4 click Default Browser and find the USB connection e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 click Default and find the USB connection Select your printer name For MAC OS 10 3 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer name in Model Name For MAC OS 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name in Model e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 if Auto Select does not work properly select Select a driver to use and your printer name in Print Using Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default printer Click Add Printing NOTE e The Macintosh printer s properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use However the composition of the printer properties window is similar e You can check your printer name in the supplied CD ROM Print
223. list To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver click Properties or Preferences in the application s Print window For details see Printer Settings on page 15 If you see Setup Printer or Options in your Print window click it instead Then click Properties on the next screen Click OK to close the printer properties window To start the print job click OK or Print in the Print window NOTE e The PostScript driver is recommended for best print image quality from PostScript based applications such as Acrobat Reader Adobe Illustrator Adobe Photoshop etc e If you are using Windows Internet Explorer the Samsung AnyWeb Print too will save your time for screen captured images or printing the image Click Start gt All programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsung AnyWeb Print gt Download the latest version to link the website where the tool is available for downloading Printing to a file PRN You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your purpose To create a file Basic Printing UJ N Check the Print to file box at the Print window amp print oo B General Select Printer B g Ea Add Printer vw Status Ready F Print to file P Location Comment Find Printer Page Range All Number of copies 1 3 3 Click Print Type in the destination path and the file name and then click OK For example c Temp f
224. ls if necessary e Tall Stand SCX DSK10T e Short Stand SCX DSK10S Caution When using the optional Stand you must install the foot as shown in the Optional Stand Install Guide 2 Bin Finisher The 2 Bin Finisher SCX FIN20S Stacker consists of big size amp Stapler output tray which holds up to 500 sheets of paper and small size output tray which holds up to 100 sheets of paper Finisher Stacker amp Stapler and store miscellaneous items like papers into the cabinet provided with the optional Stand Otherwise the machine can fall down and break causing injury to human Note If you do not use the optional tray then Tall Stand is recommended In case you add two optional trays use Short Stand SCX STP000 SCX KIT20F SCX KIT11S SCX MBT40S 500 sheets SCX FIN11S Staple Cartridge 3 x 5 000 staples per package covers maximum thickness of 50 sheets 1 staple position This card is installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device ora card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine FDI Foreign Device Interface kit SmarThru Workflow Windows 2000 XP 2003 This feature lets you send additional information along with the scanned document to a specified network location 4 Bin Mailbox You can load up to 100 sheets of paper in each stacker To use 4 Bin Mailbox you need to purchase
225. m 20 to 24 Ib bond or jamming may occur Construction Prior to printing envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not contain air Condition Envelopes should not be wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged Temperature You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation Use only well constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds Do not use stamped envelopes Do not use envelopes with clasps snaps windows coated lining self adhesive seals or other synthetic materials Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope rocoptatne 2 im snaccoptanie 2 J Envelopes with a peel off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the printer s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see page 15 1 The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling creasing or jams and may even damage the fuser For the best print quality position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope Avoid printing over the area where the envelope s seams meet lt Loading originals and print media gt Transparencies To avoid damaging the machine use only transparencies designed for use in laser printers Trans
226. metal such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a grounded power source If you walk round before finishing the installation repeat this procedure to discharge any static electricity again Installing a memory module Your machine has a dual in line memory module DIMM slot Use this memory module slot to install additional memory The order information is provided for optional memory module Page 13 1 1 Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine 2 Open the control board cover by grasping it and slide toward you control board cover 3 Take out anew memory module from the plastic bag 4 Holding the memory module by the edges align the memory module on the slot at about a 30 degree tilt Make sure that the notches of the module and the grooves on the slot fit each other 5 Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a click Note The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those on an actual DIMM and its slot 6 Replace the control board cover 7 Reconnect the power cord and printer cable and turn the machine on 14 1 lt Installing accessories gt Activating the added memory in the PS printer 1 Open the finisher cover properties After installing the memory DIMM you need to select it in the printer properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it 1 Make sure that the PostScript printer dr
227. midity areas do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time Fan the stack of paper then turn it over in the tray Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply Check adjust the paper guides if necessary Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight 75 g m 20 Ib bond paper is recommended Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared Your originals may contain pictures solids or heavy lines For example your originals may be forms newsletters books or other documents that use more toner The machine may be turned on and off frequently The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made lt Troubleshooting gt Scanning problems Suggested solutions The scanner does Make sure that you place the original to be not work scanned face down on the scanner glass or Suggested solutions Message appears There may be a copying or printing job in on your computer progress Try your job again when that job is screen finished try your job again The selected port is currently being used e Device can t be The unit scans very slowly face up in the DADF There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Prescan function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate Check that the printer cable is connected properly Make sure that the pr
228. move the back side image 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass Or load the Originals face up in the DADF Page 4 1 Press Copy from the Main screen Press the Image tab gt Adjust Backside Image Press On to activate this feature oa Ff W N Choose the level from 1 to 5 The higher the number the more the back side images are removed Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying 5 10 lt Copying gt 6 Faxing Optional This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine This chapter includes e Preparing to fax e Understanding the Fax screen e Sending a fax e Receiving a fax e Adjusting the document settings e Setting up a fax phonebook e Using the polling option e Using Mailbox e Printing a report after sending a fax e Sending a fax in toll save time e Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job e Forwarding a received fax to other destination e Setting up the end fax tone e Setting up receiving faxes in color e Sending a fax from a computer Note e You cannot use this machine as a fax via the Internet phone For more information ask the Internet service provider e We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services PSTN public switched telephone network when connecting telephone lines to use Fax If you use other Internet services DSL ISDN VoIP you can improve the connection quality by using the Micro
229. n To change password follow the next steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password Touch the password input area then the question marks appears use the number keypad on the control panel to enter the password Then press OK Factory setting 1111 4 Press the Setup tab gt Authentication 5 Press Change Admin Password 6 Enter old and new password and then confirm the new password Print Report Fax Setup Old Password Network Setup New Password Authentication Contin Password Optional Service en 7 Press OK Setting the date and time When you set the time and date they are used in Delay fax and Delay Print also they are printed on reports If however they are not correct you need to change it for correct time being 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 6 4 Press the General tab gt Date amp Time gt Date amp Time 5 Select date and time using left right arrows Or touch the insert area and use the numeric keypad on the control panel 6 Press OK Note To change the format of date and time press Date Format and Time Format Changing the display language To change the language that appears on the display refer to the following steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Adm
230. n and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start All programs Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK and type If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 3 Click Next It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select 4 lanquage from the list below English X e If necessary select a language from the drop down list 4 Select Custom installation Click Next Select Installation Type Select type that you want and click Next button Cc Typical installation fora local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer c Typical installation for a network printer Install softwares for a device that is on network Custom installatior You can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back Cancel Installing Printer Software in Windows 5 The list of printers available on the netwo
231. n ETTA nasrini nn 12 1 Clearing document JAMS cceecccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeesseeeaesseeeceeeeeeeeseceeeeeesessaaasaaeeeeeeeeeees 12 1 PUTS PSO exiting DAPET essre a A E E E E Seieeeetseeeteene 12 2 ROLET T IO e E E E E A E E E E 12 2 Saec e e e E E A E E E E E EA E E E E A E A 12 3 PPT A ET AEE E T ETA A E E EE E tees 12 3 Ae DOON y e E E E ee ee 12 5 In the optional high capacity feeder cceccccssesssecceececeeeceeececseuseeceessuueaeeeeeesseuaaseceeeseeaaeeceesseseaaaeeeeeesaaaeeeeess 12 6 In the multi purpose tray cocececccsdscrencicsaseenscaceiledicscedce husband crceseeed seeesteend camniceedaciwonedescdenstbhsxadieusile ncaa dckebeciioacweases 12 7 In the paper inside the machine cceccccccccscseeeccecceaeseeeeeceeeuseeeececeaeaseeceeeesaaasececeeseuseeceeeeseseaeeeeeseessagseeeeees 12 8 BE UV MS AS esas eects a A E E E E E E E 12 8 In the duplex unit area s2eced seccccacocsedatecatencaaseesde cogeieedoaceeeecascinoeecaecaenaceteos cceaeeccaced sce maccencagaxsas oancteadecnanceedacieendacac 12 9 Inthe stacker IIMISINON siirsin einai aE e i Ei a ERATE ADE ERTEN RARAN AREENA 12 9 Understanding display messages ccccssessccceccecseeeeeeceecsuuseeceeceeaeaseceeecesauaueceeesesauaeceesesauaaeeeeeesseaaaeeeeeesaasseseeees 12 11 Solving other problems ee 12 15 TOUGH SCHEIN PLODIGID sinri E T EE 12 15 Paper eedna ODEN e E E E E E ene eee 12 15 adler tl aie DODIE
232. n page See page 11 1 for Printing a machine report e To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button Note e If you are not sure of IP address contact your network administrator or print network information See page 11 1 for Printing a machine report e If you cannot find your machine in network please turn off the firewall and click Update After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung printers in order to receive information from Samsung If you so desire select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish Note e If your printer does not work properly after the installation try to reinstall the printer driver See Software section e During the printer driver installation process the driver installer detects the location information for your operating system and sets the default paper size for your machine If you use a different Windows location you must change the paper size to match the paper you usually use Go to printer properties to change the paper size after installation is complete Using the SetIP program This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface Especially it is for the network administrator to set se
233. n the display screen e USB Format You can delete image files stored on an USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device e USB Print You can directly print files stored on an USB memory device You can print TIFF BMP JPEG PDF and PRN files Page 9 6 e Scan to USB You can specify image size file format or color mode for each scanning to USB job Page 9 2 Plugging in an USB memory device The USB memory port on the side of your machine is designed for USB V1 1 and USB V2 0 memory devices You must use an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type connector e gt Use only a metal shielded A USB memory device 3 Note There are two USB plug types Insert an USB memory device into the USB memory port on the side of your machine lt Using USB flash memory gt Cautions e Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation or writing to or reading from USB memory This may damage your machine e If your USB memory device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide Scanning to an USB memory device You can scan a document and save the s
234. n the input field e Start Sends email This button will be enabled if you have filled from address and one of To Cc Bcc addresses e Next Moves to the next screen e Previous Returns to the previous screen If the network authentication is enabled the log off confirmation message popes up and closes Scan to Email Basic tab Scan to Server ich Ready to Scan 7 One Mailbox Entry should be selected 1 Pj 3 0 4 Pothier 5 Pihos lt 3000 dpi gt SrahSerneS Total 0 Bark e SMB Sends the scanned file to SMB Press SMB for that option e FTP Sends the scanned file to FTP Press FTP for that option e No Index number which you entered in SyncThru Web Service Page 7 7 e Server Alias name which you entered in SyncThru Web Service Page 7 7 e Duplex Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value e Back Returns to the previous screen Scan to PC If the authentication for network appears you have to enter user name and password to enter the Scan to PC screen Then select an application and press Select to enter the Basic tab Output A Scan to PE Server Ardesa gt e Duplex Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both si
235. n words or a phrase gt Used to show the steps of selecting or pressing items in order The example means press Copy from the Main screen press the Advanced tab and then press Clone Copy See Used to guide users to page 1 1 the reference page for for Special the additional detailed features information Note Copy Setup Note The date format may differ from country to country Caution Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge a pages per minute Copy gt the Advanced tab gt Clone Copy See page 1 1 for Special features e Items features options on the touch screen may differ between models depending on their configurations e The paper capacity in this user s guide is based on 75 g m 20 Ib plain paper capacity for 80 g m 20 Ib is mentioned in the paper specification See page 4 3 See page 15 1 Finding more information You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources either as a print out or onscreen Quick Install Guide User s Guide Downloadable Softwares Printer Driver Help Samsung website Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine Provides you with step by step instructions for using your machine s full features and contains information for maintaining your machine troublesho
236. nd conveniently Tray Management shows the currently installed tray and their status Usage Page Report can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type Job Status button This menu shows the job in process in waiting in completed and the notice message such as an error Page 1 6 Current Job Completed Job Active Notice Detail Detail Detail Delete Close Close Delete All Close 1 9 lt Introduction gt 2 Software overview This chapter gives you an overview of the software that comes with your machine Further details how to use the software are explained in the Software section This chapter includes e Supplied software e Printer driver features e System requirements Supplied software After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer you must install the printer and scanner software If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS user download the software from the Samsung website www samsung com printer and install Note Machine software are occasionally updated for reasons like release of new operating system and etc If needed download the latest version from the Samsung website www samsung com printer ee Windows e Printer driver Use this driver to take full advantage of your printer s features PostScript Printer driver Use this driver to print documents with
237. nditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic rela
238. ndows You can use the printer properties window which allows you to access all of the printer options you need for using your printer For details See Printer Settings on page 15 33 Using Smart Panel Opening the Troubleshooting Guide Using the troubleshooting guide you can view solutions for error status problems Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select Troubleshooting Guide Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select Options Select the settings you want from the Options window Using Your Printer in Linux You can use your machine in a Linux environment This chapter includes e Getting Started e Installing the Unified Linux Driver e Using the Unified Driver Configurator e Configuring Printer Properties e Printing a Document e Scanning a Document Getting Started You need to download Linux software package from the Samsung website www samsung com printer to install the printer and scanner softwares Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and scanner drivers providing the ability to print documents and scan images The package also delivers powerful applications for configuring your machine and further processing of the scanned documents After the driver is installed on your Linux system the driver package allows you to monitor a numbe
239. ne prints the confirmation report after each fax job only when you send a fax to one destination Report E mail The report shows the job of scanning Continue Confirmation and sending it via Scan to Email Report e On The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or failed Off No report is printed after completing a job On Error Only in case of error occurrence the machine prints the report Scan to Server The report shows the job of scanning Confirmation and sending it via SMB and FTP e On The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or failed Off No report is printed after completing a job On Error Only in case of error occurrence the machine prints the report Clean Fuser You can clean the inside of a fuser roller by printing a cleaning paper You can select among On Off Print Now Default setting is On 10 11 lt Machine status and advanced setup gt 1 1 Maintenance This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine This chapter includes Printing a machine report Monitoring the supplies life Finding the serial number Sending the imaging unit reorder notification Sending the toner reorder notification Checking Document Box Cleaning your machine Maintaining the toner cartridge Redistributing toner Replacing the toner cartridge Replacing the imaging unit Replacing the waste toner container Maintenance Parts Managing y
240. neeees 6 5 Receiving faxes manually USING AN extension telephone cccccccsseeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeneueeeecauaeeeeseeeeessaneeeeseaanes 6 6 RECEIVING IN secure receiving MOE cccccccccseeseecececceesseceeeecseueueceeeesaueseeeecsasasseceesseaaaaeeceeeesauauseeeeesasaagaeeeees 6 6 Printing received faxes on both sides Of the paper ce eeeccccccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeesesaaeeeeeeesseeaeeeeeesseaeeeeseeees 6 6 Receiving Taxes IN IMOMIORY ccctesrotitscatecsacnseacetuachtse a e a a e a E EEE Ea eiae AEEA eiia 6 6 Adjusting the document settings cessccecscseadesiedsedasiededsscedancnenatigsavssieesencduueiaienccddelvesnescbhdeasnadadenctdansiddienadediecebiadebtendelneas 6 7 DUPIE e E E E 6 7 FS SONI oee E E A E E E E E E 6 7 OPIN T E se E T noes ooaaeec eeceresuece seine paneenddeadcecnactas 6 7 HE A acer ica eters aces E se sesbe we See eae geciesoaette ose ananicts E E seeeeceeeroteoeenteee 6 7 ES BA 0 10 0 e E rn reer ee ern ee ey ane ee eee ner er ee eee 6 7 GOTAN O ee a E a 6 7 Seiting UP a fax phonebook s cssenseceececenecsacessnssceestenenseccecessasesshuesesscccccescuateusseesseeceuceetecauasauenseeenecdsecccoaeeexseeesnds 6 7 Storing individual phone numbers Speed NO ccceceessesssseecceeeeceeeeeeeeeseseececeeeeeseseseeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeesseeseageeeeeeeeeesees 6 7 Storing Group fax numbers Group NO ccccccccccceccceeseeeeseeceeeeceeeeeeeeusesseeeeeceeeeeeeseseaeeseeeeeeeeeeesesaesaaasaseee
241. ng COPIES csecheseccingezecenedabuscarsanhenedansecnanesustosnneneiciesdessieenacvedadicesetdadevaddeneatietaghcdeedecedlaaaniatasecadetiedas 5 3 Copying on both sides of originals DUDIEX issscisrarsisiscssriiesnsaroir nai rar Eaa aa Eea idaraan 5 3 Deciding the form of copy output Collated Staple cccceeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeseeeeeeeeessaaaeegs 5 4 Selecing the type Ol ONIN ALS cccszctacicctaccycncatsncadecandascuadeaiicisandadesdetnadoseid vacsadebeaeeencucesAciesuadnaidtetSendeneeeseseeeseuesdeadendes 5 5 CONOR NOUS ae eccce an pace secre secoe T E E E A 5 5 Changing the darkness eee a ln Per ae ede a ee eee 5 5 Using special copy features sec cescsiscaseccencecsaxedsdcendavedcedensuydsneendeasacwandsnndscleseeaswaicuuadsnasdelnsbieundeennangtencesanenoebesteusehekeentes 5 5 Bere 1 ge cle 0 e ne seer en err mee ne ttt taer ee ern une ere E ne ene ae eee ee ee eed en ee ae 5 5 Copying ID with the manual ID COPY option cc cceceeeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeaeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeessseeaessseseeeeeeeeesssaeaeaeseeeeeeeeeess 5 5 2 up OF 4 up copying N UD seccsiccdesired cect veccescccienccicdemensdatnncdebJndeiedseceasetwddecmsactipcdunsxecadieet seaussedesdedasauescadesvanndioeddeaus 5 6 OST CO VIN soras ice caseucatancceemecrene cee E Aes ee cace sia een E E E sine eacogeeneceene 5 6 Clone CODY ING 2 aneibecesiecsnedcndcensniestonteduecetues EEE AARSE RENE EAE EEA EAEE EEEE EEE EE EREE SEEE EENEN ARENES E 5 7 POOKCODY M
242. ns example when the transmission to station A ends before transmission to station B begins or between redial attempts 1 Press Fax from the Main screen Place the originals face up in the DADF Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab Press the Advanced tab gt Priority Send Press On Press OK N O OF A W N Press Start to start the urgent fax job Receiving a fax This section explains how to receive a fax and the special receiving methods available Changing the receive modes Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory When you receive a fax the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax But if you want to change the Fax mode to another mode refer to next steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Page 3 6 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Fax Initial Setup gt Receive Mode 4 Select the option e Telephone Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then Start e Fax Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax reception mode e Answering Machine Fax Is for when an answering machine attached to your machine Your machine answers an incoming call and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line the machine automatically switches to
243. nssmvea inet miaerrests ieyaeerorsoumiasisec aerate eonsdtenscainss 24 USNO OVEHOYS senigtininch ion orachesraateneeenibene ricardo tip EA EE N EENAA AARNA EERIE ERINE 25 Wiari AOV n EE N E A TAEA 25 Creating a New Page Overlay essssnessrnnssnrrrnrrrrrsrrrrerrrrrerrrrerrrrrerrrrerrrrrerrrrrrerrrrerrrresrrrrne 25 Using a Pag Overlay peace aiounetsuatausgaveaeeunniaevetsepeaearuatemiatetinteueteresianuetieretemeneeas 25 Deleting a Page Overlay aresttaninnine saan ni r a E RE EEEE 25 Chapter 4 USING WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT DRIVER PREC eNO S a E E EE E E e S 26 AON COO ia E EA TA E E be E A AER 26 SING aE o EE E EA T E E E meet EENE 26 Chapter 5 USING DIRECT PRINTING UTILITY OVE VIEW DOCE PNDUNG UENO tudtpeinspeetnisugpna sro ee Cl erteriotneiucee tr Dere Nn Eae EEEE ERTAN 27 EREE e ET A EA ENE ciate ote Moe ak E N T EE E E E E E E I AE 27 From tne Direct Printing Utility WINDOW aciisanatacuieonentenndetautinedananaeen i a 27 Using NG SNOrECUCICON oerein ee hee E E E EEE eer ne ee 27 Using the nont dick MENU serrer ereere ee ER E EE O EN 27 Chapter 6 SHARI NG THE PRINTER LOCALLY AWIU a Ra T CONDE aana E EE AAEE AEE EA EE pepe 28 Setting Up a Client Computer ssisrisiseiciroiotiesenis ia a a a a e a EA a 28 Chapter 7 SCANNING Scanning USING SmarThru Office 2 0 ccc cece cece eee eee eee e need eee e EEE EEE DESH EE SS DEES EEE SESE EE ESSE EEE EEE SEEEE EES 29 rna Siar Ur ONICO saivsaractatmcvs ites ieeia NE E eR 29 QOUIEK S Care
244. nt images e Surface smoothness The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper Note e Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results This may be the result of improper handling unacceptable temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which Samsung has no control e Before purchasing large quantities of print media ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this user s guide Caution Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems requiring repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreements 4 2 lt Loading originals and print media gt Specification on print media Type Plain paper 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 inches US Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches bond for the multi purpose 210 x 297 mm 8 26 x 11 69 inches tray e 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib 216 x 343 mm 8 5 x 13 5 inches JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 16 x 10 11 inches ISO B5 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 inches 184 x 267 mm 7 25 x 10 5 inches A5 148 x 210 mm 5 82 x 8 26 inches 6 bond for the tray1 bond for the high capacity feeder Statement 140 x 216 mm 5 5 x 8 5 inches a Letter A4 Oficio Refer to the Plain paper section Envelope 138 to 146 g m 36 to 39 Ib bond Transparency Labels 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ib bond Letter Legal
245. nt out is rotated 180 out order of the originals The machine prints the back sides of originals first which means the front sides of originals is printed on the back side of a paper Bar 2 gt 1 Sided Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of 2 1 one on a separate sheet F Deciding the form of copy output Collated Staple a a Press the Basic tab gt Output then use left right arrows to select Collated or 2 Stapled This feature is supported only when the original is on the DADF 2 gt 2 Sided Scans both sides of the original and prints on both Note f th This f ly th D ee Sos al aa predivenonacty igeame pant If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both out from the originals ee sides of original the message Another Page appears after the first page copied At this time load the original s the other side gt facing down and press Yes then the machine starts scanning 4 4 the second page of your original 2 gt 1 Sided Rotate Side 2 Scans both sides of the original and pices Mel te eet Ea B prints each one on a separate sheet but the information on the e Collated Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals back side of the printout is rotated 180 degree SHE e Reverse 1 gt 2 Sided Scans originals and prints them on both sides of a paper But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals The machine prints the second original first
246. nts the document with a front cover The front cover can be a blank paper or the first page in the document Back Cover Prints the document with a back cover The back cover can be a blank paper or the last page in the document Front and Back Cover Prints the document with a front cover and a back cover The covers can be blank papers or the first and the last pages in the document Transparency Separator Basic Printing 17 No Separator Does not place separator sheets between transparencies Printed Separator Places the same image on the divider Sheets as printed on the transparency Blank Separator Places a blank sheet between transparencies NOTE If you click Reset settings in the Advanced option returns to the default setting Scaling Options This option allows you to automatically or manually scale your print job on a page This option can be grayed out according to the Layout Options setting in the Basic tab e Fit to Page This option allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size For details see Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size on page 23 Percentage This option allows you to change the size of a page s contents to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage you want For details see Change percentage of your document on page 23 Graphics Tab Use the Graphic tab options to adjust the print q
247. number using the number keypad on the control panel Note To deactivate the Secure Receive feature press Off In this case the received fax will be printed out Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper Set this duplex feature to save paper When the machine prints the received fax data it prints them on both sides of the paper 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Page 3 6 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Received Fax Printing gt Duplex 4 Select appropriate option e Off Prints only one side of the paper e Long Edge Prints both sides of the paper however the binding will be the long edge e Short Edge Prints both sides of the paper however the binding will be the short edge 5 Press OK Receiving faxes in memory Since your machine is a multi tasking device it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory Then as soon as you finish copying or printing the machine automatically prints the fax lt Faxing Optional gt Adjusting the document settings Before sending a fax you can adjust the document settings such as resolution darkness color duplex and so forth Refer to explanation of this section Note The document setting herein is for only current
248. o 90 g m2 20 to 24 Ib recycled paper Envelope 75 to 90 g m2 20 to 24 Ib envelope Transparency 138 to 146 g m2 36 to 39 Ib transparency paper Labels 120 to 150 g m2 32 to 40 Ib label CardStock 120 to 163 g m2 24 to 43 Ib cardstock Bond 105 to 120 g m2 28 to 32 Ib bond Archive 70 to 90 g m2 19 to 24 Ib If you need to keep the print out for a long period time such as archives select this option Letterhead 90g m2 24 Ib letterhead Punched 60 90g9 m2 16 24 Ib punched paper e Output Bin This option allows you to choose the output bin for prinouts NOTE You need to install an optional finisher such as 2 Bin Finisher or 4 Bin Mailbox e Advanced Paper Options First Page This property allows you to print the first page using a different paper type from the rest of the document You can select the paper source for the first page For example load thick stock for the first page into the Multi purpose Tray and plain paper into Tray n Then select Tray n in the Source option and Multi Purpose Tray in the First Page option Cover Page This property provides you to print a cover page using a specific paper size and type from a specific paper source which you selected If you configure the options to make printing on two sided the first 2 pages or the last 2 pages of document will be used as a front or back cover No Covers Prints the document without covers Front Cover Pri
249. oes not mean the machine is damaged Contact a service representative when print quality problems occur 4 Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine 5 Thoroughly roll the toner cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge den 5 6 pevpeevennappeennnessih rh seqyonnevenenennnennnrppeneee te Note If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 6 Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the corresponding slot inside the machine Insert it back into its slot until it locks in place 7 Close the front cover then the side cover 8 Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on Caution If the cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate Replacing the toner cartridge The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one yellow Y magenta M cyan C and black K e The status LED and the toner related message on the display indicates which each individual toner cartridge should be replaced e The machine stops printing Incoming faxes are saved in memory At this stage the toner cartridge needs to be replaced Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine Page 13 1 1 Turn the machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool 2 Open the side cover Note T
250. of the active job such as job type recipient e Logout Logs out from the currently logged in account phone number and other information Note e Detail Shows the detailed information of the selected option on the Current Job Completed Job and Active Notice list e Delete Removes the selected job from the list e Delete All Removes all the jobs from the list e Close Closes the job status window and switches to previous view e Icons shown on the display screen such as Fax may be grayed out depending on the optional kit or program installed in your machine e To switch the display screen and see other available icons press the right arrow on the display screen 1 6 lt Introduction gt Power Saver button When the machine is not in use save electricity with the provided power save mode Pressing this button puts the machine into power save mode Page 3 6 If you press Power Saver button for more than two seconds a window appears requesting that you turn the power off If you choose Yes the power is turned off This button can also be used to turn the button on on E e The machine is not in the power save mode e The machine is in the low power save mode Blue The machine is in the power save mode The machine is in the ready power save mode Interrupt button When you press Interrupt button the machine goes into interrupt mode which means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job When the u
251. ollated copy if your document has odd pages the last page of the first copy and the first page of the next copy will be printed on the front and back of one sheet In case of Uncollated copy the Same page will be printed on the front and back of one Sheet Therefore if you need multiple copies of a document and you want those copies on both sides of the paper you must print them one at a time as separate print jobs Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Scanning You can scan docoments using Image Capture program Macintosh OS offers Image Capture program Scanning with USB Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass OR load the document s face up into the ADF or DADF 3 Start Applications and click Image Capture NOTE If No Image Capture device connected message appears disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it If the problem persists please refer to the Image Capture s help 4 Set the scan options on this program 5 Scan and save your scanned image NOTE e For more information about using Image Capture please refer to the Image Capture s help e Use TWAIN compliant softwares to apply more scan options e You can also scan using TWAIN compliant softwares such as Adobe Photoshop e Scan process differs according to TWAIN compliant softwares Please refer to the user s guide of th
252. on 9 Enter the SMTP server login name and password 10 Click Apply Note If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3beforeSMTP check the box next to SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication a Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name b Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 25 Storing email addresses There are two kinds of email addresses Local on your machine s memory and Global on the LDAP server which differ depending on where they are stored Local is that email addresses are stored in the machine s memory and Global is that email addresses are stored in the certain LDAP server Through the SyncThru Web Service you can easily enter and store email addresses from your computer Individual 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Machine Settings gt E mail Setup gt Individual Address Book Then the screen shows Individual Address Book on the right side of the screen 5 Click Add 6 When the Add E Mail screen appears select the Index number enter User Name and E mail Address 7 Click Apply 8 Check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your machine by pressing Local gt the Individual tab Group 1 Access to the SyncThru Web Service from your computer 2 Make sure you have con
253. on e Off Disables this feature e Top Secret Prints the original with Top Secret text e Confidential Prints the original with Confidential text e Urgent Prints the original with Urgent text Draft Prints the original with Draft text e Custom The machine prints the original with the customized text 6 Select 1st Page only Size Position Darkness of options 7 Press OK 8 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying lt Copying gt Overlay copying If you scan and store the data such as format you can copy the original with the previously stored data 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt Overlay Press List Select a file name Nn O OF A Q N Select a overlay option e New Makes the new overlay Select options for a new overlay and enter the file name Detail Shows information of the selected overlay e Edit Modifies the name of the selected overlay e Delete Deletes the selected overlay e Apply Prints the originals with the selected overlay e Print Prints the selected overlay e Cancel Cancels overlay options you have selected 8 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying If you have selected option New in step 7 the machine starts storing the new overlay by pressing
254. on an envelope change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side Printing on seams can cause problems If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page adjust the print resolution through your software application or in printer properties Misformed If characters are improperly formed and characters producing hollow images the paper stock may be too slick Try different paper AaBbCc Page 4 3 AaBbCc If characters are improperly formed and AaBbCc producing a wavy effect the scanner unit AaBbCc may need service Contact a service AaBbCc representative AaBbCc Suggested solutions Page skew e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality Page 4 3 Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl Page 4 3 Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality Page 4 3 Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Back of printouts Check for leaking toner Clean the inside of are dirty the machine Contact a service representative Solid Color o
255. ond Image Position LEFT TOP X 105mm Y 020mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 205mm Y 100mm e Third Image Position LEFT TOP X 000mm Y 150mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 100mm Y 230mm Forth Image Position LEFT TOP X 105mm Y 150mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 205mm Y 230mm Press OK the template you have saved will be shown in the template list table Press and select Copy Press the Advanced tab gt ID Copy gt Mamual ID Copy Setup Press the template you have saved from the template list Press the Start button on the control panel now follow the instruction on display to finish the ID copy for four images 2 up or 4 up copying N up The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages onto one sheet of paper DO l N i a 2 up copying a 4 up copying Load the originals face up in the DADF Page 4 1 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt N Up Select Off 2Up or 4Up e Off Copies an original onto one sheet of paper e 2Up Copies two separate originals onto one page e 4Up Copies four separate originals onto one page oF ND 6 Press Start on the control panel Note You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce Enlarge for the N Up feature Poster copying Your original will be divided into 9 portions You can paste the printed pages together to make one p
256. one sheet of paper Press Scan to Email from the Main screen Note If the authentication message shows enter User Name and Password This message shows only when the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web Service Page 11 9 Press the From tab and enter the sender s email address lt Scanning gt Press the From tab and enter the sender s email address Press the To Cc Bcc tab and enter the Recipient s email address Press the Subject tab and enter the subject of the email Press the Message tab and enter the contents of the email If neccessary press the Options tab and set options for scanning O O N O Oo A Press the Start button to scan and send the file Note While the machine is sending an email you cannot do the copy job either sending a fax Setting up an e mail account To scan and send an image as an email attachment you need to set up network parameters using SyncThru Web Service 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service Click Machine Settings gt E mail Setup Select IP Address or Host Name Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name Nn O OF A WD N Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 25 8 Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require authenticati
257. oner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged Contact a service representative when print quality problems occur 11 4 lt Maintenance gt 3 Open the front cover 7 Hold the new toner cartridge by the handle and slide the new toner cartridge in until it locks in place 4 8 Close the front cover then the side cover 9 Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on Caution v If the cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate 5 Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag 6 Thoroughly roll the new cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge Note If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 11 5 lt Maintenance gt 4 Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle Replacing the imaging unit E VP A Wi WH fp f Wf p l p A ZNS c VA i N OG Se X y as ab gt O O Soe D i amp am MAI Q rob po 5 CZ me Q 5 Turn the imaging unit locking levers outwards to release and open 6 Pull the used imaging unit out of the machine using the handle on its Le O e g a J ns Cc V 22 T SD Q C c A ce Ooc 2 QE Og 5 cz gt ON wo D09 D L V LEL FT
258. option allows you to print a page on one side of a paper Multiple Pages Per Side option allows you to print several pages on one side of a paper For details see Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing on page 21 Poster Printing option allows you to print your document into a poster size document This option prints your document into Basic Printing 16 several pages Paste printed pages together to form one poster size document For details see Printing Posters on page 22 Booklet Printing option allows you to print your document on both sides of the paper to make into a booklet For details see Printing Booklets on page 22 Double Sided Printing Double Sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of paper If this option does not appear your printer does not have this feature e For details see Printing on Both Sides of Paper on page 23 Paper Tab Use the Paper tab options to set the basic paper handling Specifications Click the Paper tab to display the options shown below See Printing a Document on page 14 for more information on accessing printer properties amp Printing Preferences Basic Paper Graphics Advanced Samsung Copies Letter Omm w 8 50 x 11 00 inches i Number of Copies Color Oinch 0 s Grayscale Paper Options Paper Envelope Size Letter Source Auto Select Type Printer Def
259. or standard anytime you want 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting gt Setup gt Color gt Auto Color Tone Adjustment gt Setting Color Standard You can only select this option if Auto Color Tone Adjustment is set to On Setting up the network You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network printer You can set up the basic network settings with the machine s touch screen Note If you want to use the USB cable connect the cable between a computer and you machine Refer to the software installation in Software section Supported operating systems The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine item f Requirements Network interface 10 100 1000 Base TX Network e Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 Vista 7 2008 R2 operating system Various Linux OS e Mac OS X 10 3 10 6 Network e TCP IP on windows protocols e DHCP e BOOTP Note If you want to set up DHCP network protocol go to http developer apple com networking bonjour download select the Bonjour program that is appropriate for your computer operating system and install the program This program will allow you to set network parameters automatically Follow the instructions in the installation window This program does not support Linux Configuring network protocol via the machine You can setup TCP IP Network parameters please follow the steps listed below 1
260. or font list etcetera enabled with SyncThru Web Service Page 11 9 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel Standard Acct Prints the used amount of standard 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter Usage Report accounting password and press OK Standard Acct Prints the remained amount of Remain standard accounting Report 10 10 lt Machine status and advanced setup gt Description Note You can also print machine s status information and browse Report aia eT r e can print a report on the status with SyncThru Web Service Open the web browser on Report machine s overall configuration your networked computer and type the IP address of your Fax Report You can set to print the information of machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click a fax reports Information gt Print information Multi Send Report When you fax to several destination set this option to print a transmission report On is to print every time you send a fax the machine prints a confirmation report With On Error only when the transmission error occurred the report will be printed out Fax Send Report Appearance You can select whether the image on the confirmation report shows or not Fax Sent Received Report The machine stores the logs on each transmission and prints out every 50 logs with this option On It you select Off the machine stores the logs but does not print Fax Send Report The machi
261. ost widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present EtherTalk A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking FDI Foreign Device Interface FDI is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine FTP A File Transfer Protocol FTP is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol such as the Internet or an intranet Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media It consists of a hot roller and a back up roller After toner is transferred onto the paper the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer Gateway A connection between computer networks or between a computer network and a telephone line It is very popular as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale colors are represented by various shades of gray Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number o
262. oster sized document This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass Each portion is scanned and printed on by one in the following order Ome y Are rT iy yay 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 Note The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature 2 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt Poster Copy 5 6 lt Copying gt Note If this option is grayed out select following options in the Basic tab to activate it Duplex to 1 gt 1 Sided Reduce Enlarge to Original 100 Paper Supply to Tray 5 Press On to activate this feature 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Note Your original is divided into 9 portions Each portion is scanned and printed one by one in the following order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Clone copying The machine prints multiple original images on a single page The number of images is automatically determined by the original image and the paper size y lt Aak ak 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 Note The original must be placed on the scanner glass in order to use this feature 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Select the tray in Paper Supply 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Clone Copy
263. oting and installing accessories This user s guide also contains Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in various operating systems and how to use the included software utilities SyncThru Web Admin Service convenient for network administrators who need to manage many machines simultaneously http solution samsungprinter com Samsung AnyWeb Print helps personal users to screen capture the website screen in Windows Internet Explorer easily http solution samsungprinter com personal anywebprint Samsung Easy Color Manager helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like http solution samsungprinter com personal colormanager Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing To access a printer driver help screen click Help from the printer properties dialog box If you have Internet access you can get help support printer drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www Samsung com printer Safety and Regulatory Information Important Precautions and Safety Information When using this machine these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to people 2 3 10 11 12 13 Read and understand all instructions Use common sense whenever ope
264. ounts of alcohol solvent or other strong substances can discolor or damage the cabinet e If your machine or its Surrounding is contaminated with toner we recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it If you use a vacuum cleaner toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint free cloth You can dampen the cloth slightly with water but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine Cleaning the inside Contact a service representative to clean the inside of the machine Cleaning the scan unit Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner lid 3 Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is clean and dry 4 2 1 Scanner lid 2 Scanner glass 3 White sheet SS 4 DADF glass Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean and dry 5 Close the scanner lid lt Maintenance gt z For example if you print a lot of graphics the consumption of the toner is Maintaining the toner cartridge high and you may need to change the cartridge more often Toner cartridge storage Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light Re
265. our machine from the website Printing a machine report You can print the machine s information and job report 1 2 3 Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Machine Status gt the Machine Info tab gt Print Report Select the report type then the right side of the screen shows the list to print Select the list to print T Renty Supplies Life Selem Report Let Dmame Sssstinot Hipiri Error Messiga Popor Scan Report Error information Perrot Configuration Report Fax Raport Counter bifonnation Hol List Back 5 Press Print Note e If you want to print the machine s network information or font list press Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt the Print Report tab In case you select the Configuration Report just press Print Now to print the report The Fax Report E mail Confirmation Report and Scan to Server Confirmation options do not provide the print these are only for report setup You can use SyncThru Web Service to print the machine s configuration or browse the status Open the web browser in the networked computer and type the machine s IP address When SyncThru Web Service is opened click Information gt Print information Monitoring the supplies life If you want to view the supply life indicators follow the next step 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Machine Status 3 Scroll down to browse the entire supplies with list view the percentage remainin
266. ous access for different consumer applications to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them is allowed to gain control over the device at a time The other consumer will encounter device busy response This usually happens while starting the scan procedure and an appropriate message box will be displayed To identify the source of the problem you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or you should press the Release port button if you are sure that the port owner is not functioning properly e Check if Gimp Front end has Xsane Device dialog on the Acquire menu If not you should install the Xsane plug in for Gimp on your computer You can find Xsane plug in package for Gimp on downloaded Linux package from Samsung website or on the Gimp home page For detailed information refer to Help for Linux or Gimp Front end application lf you wish to use an other kinds of scan applications refer to the Help for application Please avoid chan
267. owing features Printer 7 fa Presets Standard E Copies 1 J MW Collated Two Sided Pages All OFrom 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 oP 6 26 by 11 69 inches Orientation Tt Te Aayour O O O Pages per Sheer 1 Ez yout Direction re S vt N lhl yh Lofl ee TER I Border None He Two Sided OF H Reverse Page Orientation 7 C POFy Supplies Low Cancel Prine A Mac OS 10 5 ePages per Sheet This feature determines how many pages printed on one page For details see Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper on the next column eLayout Direction You can select the printing direction on a page as like the examples on Ul Border This option allows you to print a border around each page on the sheet Two Sided This option allows you to print on both sides of a paper See Duplex Printing on page 48 Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Graphics The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Resolution Quality and Color Mode Select Graphics form the Presets drop down list to access the graphic features Printer H a Precete Standard Copies I conard C Two Sided Pages fh ai From l w 1 Paper Size US Letter ASO by 110 inches CGrientahon B Te Graphics ial Quality Best S im Normal _ Draft l fl b bh a1 Color Mode Color _ Grayscale SAMSUNG O Pore Supplies Cancel G AMac OS 10 5 eResolution Quality You can s
268. page 4 3 Attempting to print on damp curled wrinkled or torn paper can cause paper jams and poor print quality For the best print quality use only high quality copier grade paper specifically recommended for use in laser printers Avoid using the following media types Paper with embossed lettering perforations or a texture that is too smooth or too rough Erasable bond paper Multi paged paper Synthetic paper and thermally reactive paper Carbonless paper and Tracing paper Use of these types of paper could result in paper jams chemical smells and damage to your machine Store print media in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use it Place cartons on pallets or shelves not on the floor Do not place heavy objects on top of the paper whether it is packaged or unpackaged Keep it away from moisture or other conditions that can cause it to wrinkle or curl Store unused print media at temperatures between 15 C and 30 C The relative humidity should be between 10 and 70 Store unused print media in a moisture proof wrap such as a plastic container or bag to prevent dust and moisture from contaminating your paper Load special media types one sheet at a time through the multi purpose tray to avoid paper jams To prevent print media such as transparencies and label sheets from sticking together remove them as they print out Weight The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g
269. parencies used in the printer must be able to withstand the machine s fusing temperature Labels e To avoid damaging the machine use only labels designed for use in laser printers When selecting labels consider the following factors Adhesives The adhesive material should be stable at your machine s fusing temperature Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see page 15 1 Arrangement Only use labels with no exposed backing between them Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels causing serious jams Curl Prior to printing labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm 5 inches of curl in any direction Condition Do not use labels with wrinkles bubbles or other indications of separation Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause paper jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see page 15 1 Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine Do not leave them in the paper tray for long periods of time Dust an
270. ped with a Duplex can print double sided of paper Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year The lifespan means the average capacity of print outs usually within the warranty period For example if the duty cycle is 48 000 pages per month assuming 20 working days a printer limits 2 400 pages a day ECM Error Correction Mode ECM is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise 16 1 lt Glossary gt Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system so that the second system behaves like the first system Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior which is in contrast to simulation which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated often considering its internal state Ethernet Ethernet is a frame based computer networking technology for local area networks LANs It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer and frame formats and protocols for the media access control MAC data link layer of the OSI model Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802 3 It has become the m
271. pening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks Incorrect reassembly could cause electric shock when the unit is subsequently used Unplug the machine from the telephone jack PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions e When any part of the power cord plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed If liquid has been spilled into the machine If the machine has been exposed to rain or water If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed If the machine has been dropped or the cabinet appears damaged e If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance 14 Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation 15 Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning If possible unplug the AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm 16 The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation If you are using a cord which Is longer than 2 m with 110 V machine then it should be 16 AWG or bigger 17 Use only No 26 AWG or larger telephone line cord 18 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Laser Safety Statement
272. per 3 Close the side cover Printing automatically resumes 3 Close the side cover In the stacker finisher Paper jam in front of finisher Open the stacker front cover 1 lt Troubleshooting gt 12 9 2 Pull the stacker lever 1a down If necessary pull the stacker lever 2 Press right of 1c lever and then push stacker to left 1b down as well Y y 3 Remove the jammed paper 3 Remove the jammed paper 4 Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound click 5 Close the stacker front cover gt x Q Nn ho cb lt D c cb E S ho Q y A _ eb lt a c oO S z S ho a A Open the stacker front cover 1 4 Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the stacker front cover X l lt Troubleshooting gt 12 10 Paper jam at exit of finisher 1 Gently pull the paper out through the exit area Understanding display messages Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control panel display to indicate machine status or errors Refer to the tables below to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem if necessary Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical order Note e If the message is
273. perties window for Windows XP Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use NOTE e Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver Change all print settings available in the software application first and change any remaining settings using the printer driver e The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current program To make your changes permanent make them in the Printers folder e The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help 1 Click the Windows Start button 2 Select Printers and Faxes 3 Select your printer driver icon 4 Right click on the printer driver icon and select Printing Preferences 5 Change the settings on each tab click OK 26 Advanced You can use advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button eB PS Advanced Document Settings l fin Graphic Jio Document Options e Paper Output this option allows you to select the size of the paper loaded in the tray e Graphic this option allows you to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs e Document Options this options allow you to set the PostScript options or printer features Using Help You can click from the upper right corner of the window and then click on any setting Using
274. phical interface and failed to install the software you have to use the driver in the text mode Follow the steps 3 to 4 and then follow the instructions on the terminal screen 5 When the welcome screen appears click Next Unified Linux Driver Installer Welcome to the Unified Linux Driver installation wizard This program will install all necessary software for printers and MFP devices Click Next to continue with the Setup program Help Next gt Cancel 6 When the installation is complete click Finish Unified Linux Driver Installer Unified Linux Driver is installed Please re logon your system for all the installation settings to take effect User Registration Do you want to register yourself as user of the printer MFP model you just installed Being registered you will gain access to various services X Yes want to be registered as user Hele f l Finish The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience If you have any difficulties consult the onscreen help that is available through your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver package Windows applications such as Unified Driver Configurator or I mage Manager Installing the SmartPanel l Make sure that you connect your machine to your computer Turn both the computer and the machine on 2 When
275. printer in use However the composition of the printer properties window is similar Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM When you select an option in printer properties you may see an exclamation 2 mark or mark An exclamation mark means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended and amp mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine s setting or environment The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application program you are using Refer to the User s Guide of your software application for the exact printing procedure l Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window is displayed It may look slightly different depending on your application 14 The basic print settings are selected within the Print window These settings include the number of copies and print range General Select Printer a g SS Add Printer PX Make sure that your C Print to fie printer is selected Number of copies 1 i i Dri 3f f 3 nee nee All Select your machine from the Select Printer
276. ption OE Spool32 or Illegal Operation messages appear Fail To Print A printer timeout error occurred messages appear Note Exit all software applications Remove all software from the StartUp Group then restart Windows Reinstall the printer driver Close all other applications reboot Windows and try printing again These messages may appear during printing Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing If the message appears in standby mode or after printing has been completed check the connection and or whether an error has occurred Refer to Microsoft Windows User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages 12 22 lt Troubleshooting gt Common PostScript problems The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are being used Note To receive a printed or screen displayed message when PostScript errors occur open the Print Options window and click the desired selection next to the PostScript errors section PostScript file The PostScript e Install the PostScript cannot be driver may not be driver referring to printed installed correctly Software section Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for printing If the problem persists contact a service representative Limit Check Error message appears The prin
277. py quality by selecting the document type for the current copy job Page 5 5 e Color B W Auto You can switch this mode among color black white and automatic mode Select whether the user print copies in mono or color If you select the Auto mode the machine detects the original document and decide the output is colored or not In this case the copying speed will be reduced Note e When Auto mode is used there maybe some orginals for which the mode is not correctly switched between in color and black white In this case select Color or B W manually as appropriate to the original e Light Dark Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is easier to read when the original contains faint markings and dark images Page 5 5 e Paper Supply Selects the paper supply tray Advanced tab 2B Ready To Copy ott Poster Copy Ott Clone Copy Ott Book Copy Ott L e ID Copy Prints 2 sided originals on one sheet of paper This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as a business card Page 5 5 e N Up Prints 2 or 4 original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of paper Page 5 5 e Poster Copy Prints a large image into divided 9 pages Page 5 6 e Clone Copy Prints multiple image copies from the original document on a single page Page 5 7 e Book Copy Allows you to copy an entire book Page 5 7 e Booklet Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1 sided or 2 s
278. r Black pages e The imaging unit may not be installed properly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it e The imaging unit may be defective and need replacing Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Page 11 4 e The machine may require repair Contact a service representative lt Troubleshooting gt Suggested solutions Loose toner Character Voids Horizontal stripes AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Wes C An unknown image repetitively appears on the next few sheets or loose toner light print or contamination occurs e Clean the inside of the machine Contact a service representative e Check the paper type and quality Page 4 3 e Remove the imaging unit and then install a new one Page 11 4 e If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black e If you are using transparencies try another type of transparency Because of the composition of transparencies some character voids are normal You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper Remove the paper and turn it around The paper may not meet paper specifications Page 4 3 If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear e The imaging unit may be installed improperly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it The imaging unit may be defective Remove the imaging unit and install a new
279. r select Custom in the Paper tab in the printer propeties See Software section 4 9 lt Loading originals and print media gt 5 Copying This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a copy machine This chapter includes e Understanding the Copy screen e Copying originals e Changing the settings for each copy e Using special copy features Understanding the Copy screen When you press Copy on the Main screen the Ready To Copy screen appears which has several tabs and lots of copying options All the options are grouped by features so that you can configure your selections easily If the screen displays an other menu press to go to the Main screen Basic tab Advanced image Original Size Original Type I lt cmo gt Text TexvPhoto Photo Pe an Vion Magazine lt inado Poe Q 6 Oran 00 j more 0 Color Mode Duplex Color B W Auto US nisa pry mre ida GD as Output Light Dark e Uncoliited o gt imore rs DDD e Original Size Selects the size of the originals Page 5 3 e Reduce Enlarge Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image Page 5 3 e Duplex Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the paper Page 5 3 e Output Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options If you install the optional stacker amp stapler then the staple related option appears Page 5 4 Text Text Photo Photo Magazine Improves the co
280. r Name IP Port Name Local Par NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing the installer from Update detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on this PC before continuing with the installation Set IP Address 7 NOTE If your printer is not already connected to the computer the following window will appear Connect Device Setup can not find a connected device Check connection between your computer and the printer Please refer to the following connection method 1 Connect the device to your computer 2 Turn on the power of the device 3 If New Hardware Wizard is appeared close it 4 Click Next E o Cancel e After connecting the printer click Next e If you don t want to connect the printer at this time click Next and No on the following screen Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation e The installation window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use 6 Select the components to be installed and click Next Select components that you would like to install PSnmsunod Select components Select components that you would like to install Chanae Destination Folder lt Back Cancel NOTE You can change the desired installation folder by clicking Browse 7 A
281. r driver Use this driver to run your machine from a Linux computer and print documents SANE Use this driver to scan documents Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing Printer driver Use this file to run your machine from a Macintosh computer and print documents Scan driver TWAIN driver is available for scanning documents on your machine Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing 2 1 lt Software overview gt a Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image System requirements editor and to send the image by email You can also open another image editor program like Adobe Photoshop from SmarThru For details please Before you begin ensure that your system meets the following refer to the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program requirements Windows Printer driver features ES Ai Ne a Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems Your printer drivers support the following standard features Requirement recommended e Paper source selection Operating e Paper size orientation and media type system e Number of copies In addition you can use various special printing features The following Windows 2000 al eile ae table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer Pentium z
282. r icon and select Printing Preferences 5 Change the settings on each tab click OK Basic Tab Use Basic tab to adjust how the document appear on the printed page Click the Basic tab to display the options shown below See Printing a Document on page 14 for more information on accessing printer properties amp Printing Preferences Basic Paper Graphics Advanced Samsung Orientation Letter Omm 8 50 x 11 00 inches inch O Landscape _ Rotate 180 Degrees J gt 9 O Best Normal O Draft Layout Options Type Single Page Per Side Double Sided Printing Printer Default O None O Long Edge O Short Edge Update Orientation Orientation allows you to select the direction in which information is printed on a page e Portrait prints across the width of the page letter style e Landscape prints across the length of the page spreadsheet style e Rotate 180 Degrees allows you to rotate the page the selected degrees Ti A Portrait A Landscape Quality The available Quality options may vary depending on your machine The higher the setting the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics The higher setting may also increase the printing time of a document Layout Options Layout Options allows you to select various ways to layout your document Single Page Per Side is a basic layout option This
283. r of machine devices via fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously The acquired documents can then be edited printed on the same local or network machine devices sent by e mail uploaded to an FTP site or transferred to an external OCR system The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and flexible installation program You don t need to search for additional components that might be necessary for the Unified Linux Driver software all required packages will be carried onto your system and installed automatically this is possible on a wide set of the most popular Linux clones Using Your Printer in Linux 34 Installing the Unified Linux Driver Installing the Unified Linux Driver l Make sure that you connect your machine to your computer Turn both the computer and the machine on 2 When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password NOTE You must log in as a super user root to install the printer software If you are not a Super user ask your system administrator 3 From the Samsung website download and unpack the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer 4 Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in root localhost root tar zxf FilePath UnifiedLinuxDriver tar gz root localhost root cd FilePath cdroot Linux root localhost Linux install sh NOTE If you do not use the gra
284. r originals containing mostly text e Text Photo Use for originals with mixed text and photographs e Photo Use when originals are photographs e Magazine Use when originals are magazines Color Mode Select the color mode you want to use Color Mode Color B W Auto dda D tas e Color Copys the originals in color B W Copys the originals in black and white e Auto The machine automatically senses the color of the originals and copys in color or b w according to the originals Changing the darkness This defines the degree of darkness Use left right arrows to change the level of light dark in the printouts Light T Dark we RB Using special copy features On the Advanced tab or the Image tab of the Copy screen you can select specific copy features ID card copying The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as a business card Note The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature 1 Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown and close the scanner lid 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Press the Advanced tab gt ID Copy 4 Press Start on the control panel Then the machine starts scanning the front side 5 Turn the
285. r the output tray Your machine has an odd smell during initial use The print quality of photos is not good Images are not clear The machine does not print special sized paper such as a billing paper Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing The oil used to protect the fuser is evaporating The resolution of the photo Is very low Paper size and paper size setting do not match Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options Note It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image This is not a problem Just keep printing After printing about 100 color pages there will be no more smell It is a temporary issue Reduce the photo size If you increase the photo size in the software application the resolution will be reduced Set the correct paper size in the Custom in the Paper tab in the printer propeties See Software section lt Troubleshooting gt Printing quality problems Suggested solutions If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly White Spots White spots appears on the page you may notice a reduction in print quality See the table below to clear the problem Suggested solutions Light or faded print Toner specks Dropouts AaBbCc AaBbUc Aa
286. ram used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer Print Media The media like paper envelopes labels and transparencies which can be used on a printer a scanner a fax or a Copier PPM Pages Per Minute PPM is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute PRN file An interface for a device driver this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input output system calls which simplifies many tasks Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection communication and data transfer between two computing endpoints PS See PostScript 16 3 lt Glossary gt PSTN The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN is the network of the world s public circuit switched telephone networks which on industrial premises is usually routed through the switchboard Resolution The sharpness of an image measured in Dots Per Inch DPI The higher the dpi the greater the resolution SMB Server Message Block SMB is a network protocol mainly applied to share files printers serial ports and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network It also provides an authenticated Inter process communication mechanism SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is the standard for e mail transmissions across the Internet SMTP is a relatively simple
287. rating electrical appliances Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information heed the safety information You may have misunderstood the operating instruction If you cannot resolve the conflict contact your sales or service representative for assistance Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and or telephone jack before cleaning Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners Use only a damp cloth for cleaning Do not place the machine on an unstable cart stand or table It may fall causing serious damage Your machine should never be placed on near or over a radiator heater air conditioner or ventilation duct Do not allow anything to rest on the power Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords This can diminish performance and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power telephone or PC interface cords Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings They may touch dangerous voltage points creating a risk of fire or shock Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble the machine Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required O
288. rch Search window shows Press the initial alohabet key of the address you are looking for When the search is completed the screen displays the search results 5 Press Apply Keep selecting addresses as many as you want 6 Press x to return to Scan to Email Entering email addresses by the keyboard When you press the input field in the From To Cc or subject and message input field the keyboard shows on the display screen The following explanation is the example that you are entering abcdefg abc com 1 Press From tab from the Scan to Email From Detaut The sesxder s ermal address Enter your emal address Your email address yall be shown in the reapient s mai as a sender Next gt 2 Press the input field Press a b c d e f g Press Press a b c Press and press c 0 m N O OF A OW Press OK after finishing all the contents Using Samsung Scan Manager If you have installed the printer driver Samsung Scan Manager program has installed too Start Samsung Scan Manager program to find out about this program information and the installed scan driver s condition Through this program you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders where scanned documents are saved in your computer Note Tne Samsung Scan Manager program can only be used in the Window and Macintosh system If you use the Macintosh see Software section 1 From the Start menu click Control Panel gt S
289. rectly Do not overload the tray Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing Flex fan and straighten paper before loading Do not use creased damp or highly curled paper Do not mix paper types in a tray Use only recommended print media Page 4 9 Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the tray or facing down in the multi purpose tray If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5 B5 sized paper Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the tray If load the paper this way printing both sides of the paper Duplex is not supported Clearing document jams When an original jams while passing through the DADF the warming message appears on the display screen Caution t To avoid tearing the document remove the jammed document gently and slowly Note To prevent document jams use the scanner glass for thick thin or mixed paper type originals 1 Remove any remaining pages from the DADF 2 Open the DADF cover oO KAN SS Note If you see no paper in this area refer to Roller misfeed Page 12 2 4 Close the DADF cover Then reload the pages you removed if any in the DADF 12 1 lt Troubleshooting gt Misfeed of exiting paper Roller misfeed 1 Remove the remaining documents from the
290. reen 1 5 document box 11 2 driver feature 2 2 installation 3 3 duplex copying 5 3 faxing 6 7 scanning 7 9 9 3 E email address entering email addresses to input field 7 6 Global 7 5 Group 7 5 Individual 7 5 storing 7 5 erasing background copying 5 10 faxing 6 7 scanning 7 10 9 4 erasing punch hole 5 10 error correction mode 10 5 error message 12 11 extension telephone 6 6 F fax option kit enabling option feature after installing the kit 14 3 ordering 1 2 13 1 fax receiving changing the receive mode 6 5 extension telephone 6 6 in answering machine fax 6 5 in memory 6 6 receiving in duplex 6 6 secure receiving 6 6 fax sending automatic resending 6 4 delay sending 6 4 duplex sending 6 3 redialing the last number 6 4 sending a fax 6 3 sending a fax manually 6 4 sending a priority fax 6 5 setting a fax header 6 3 fax setup 10 5 faxing color mode 6 7 darkness 6 7 duplex 6 6 enabling the fax kit option 10 8 14 3 erasing background 6 7 Original type 6 7 phonebook 6 7 printing a fax report 11 1 resolution 6 7 solving faxing problems 12 21 FDI authentication 10 7 dummy 1 4 FDI Foreign Interface Device ordering 1 2 13 2 finisher Stacker amp Stapler connection 1 4 ordering 1 2 13 2 paper jam 12 9 front cover 1 3 FIP 7 7 G general settings 10 2 Gray scan 7 10 9 4 Group Group fax number 6 8 ID copy 5 5 ID stamp in copying 10 4 Individual email addresses for scanning
291. rgent copy job completes the previous printing job continues Off The machine is not in interrupt printing mode Bue On The machine is in interrupt printing mode Note Interrupt mode is resumed at default value Off after the machine is shut down or reset Understanding the Status LED When the problem occurs the Status LED indicates the machine s condition by the light color of it s action Status a a e The machine is off line e The machine is in power save mode When data is received or any button is pressed it switches to on line automatically Green The machine is on line and can be used Blinking When the backlight slowly blinks the machine is receiving data from the computer e When the backlight blinks rapidly the machine is printing data S e The imaging unit is out of lifespan Remove the old imaging unit and install a new one Page 11 6 A toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge life Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one Page 11 4 A paper jam has occurred Page 12 3 The cover is opened Close the cover There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray The machine has stopped due to a major error Check the display message Page 12 11 The waste toner container not installated in the machine or full waste toner container Page 11 8 Blinking The estimated cartridge life of toner is close You can temporarily improve print quality by redis
292. riginals in it 1 2 Press Fax from the Main screen Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document faced down Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab 6 10 lt Faxing Optional gt 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Mailbox gt Store i gt Heady to fax Lm li ma k oo ap Mama cannot be empty Store Send to Renate Lieder Poll tran Hernate Petting Lady Fol Fiam Mailer Print Herotit 5 Enter Mailbox No and Passcode which are set from Creating Mailbox in page 6 10 2 Ready to F ax One Mailbox Entry should be selected Malibax No 6 Press OK Note e Deleting the data in a specific Mailbox Press Fax gt the Advanced tab gt Mailbox gt Delete enter Mailbox No and Passcode and then press OK When the confirmation window appears press Yes to complete the job e Printing a Mailbox Press Fax gt the Advanced tab gt Mailbox gt Print enter Mailbox No and Passcode and press OK Faxing to a remote Mailbox To fax and store the originals in a recipient s Mailbox in this machine you can use the Send to Remote feature 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 3 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Mailbox gt Sen
293. rk appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next Select Printer Port Psnmsunid Select a port that will be used for your printer Local or TCP IP Port C Shared Printer UNC C Add TCP IP Port Advanced Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list Printer Name IP Port Name Cs Local Por NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing the installer from Update detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on this PC before continuing with the installation Set IP Address He Cancel e If you click the Advanced button you can search a priter with the SNMP Community Name Default name is public e f you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the printer To verify your printer s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration page in machine e To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button e If you select Add TCP IP Port you can enter Pv4 IPv6 or the Hostname TIP If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific network printer click the Set I P
294. rmal 13 amp plug sockets You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor Do not remove the moulded plug Warning If you cut off the moulded plug get rid of it straight away You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket Important warning You must earth this machine The wires in the mains lead have the following color code e Green and Yellow Earth e Blue Neutral e Brown Live lf the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug do the following You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter E or by the safety Earth symbol or colored green and yellow or green You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter N or colored black You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter L or colored red You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug adaptor or at the distribution board Declaration of Conformity European Countries Approvals and Certifications The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93 68 EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated Hereby Samsung Electronics declare that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC The declaration of conformity may be
295. rmat Selects the file format of the scan output Page 7 11 e Back Returns to the previous screen Note Scan to PC only supports File Format menu User authentication for network scanning To send an email FTP SMB or Network you must register authorized local or network users using SyncThru Web Service If user authentication has been activated only authorized local users or on the DB server SMB LDAP Kerberos can send scanned data to the network email FTP SMB For network scanning using the authentication feature you must register the network or local authentication configuration using the SyncThru Web Service User authentication has 3 options none Default network authentication and local authentication Registering local authorized users 1 7 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web site of your machine Click Machine Settings Select Local Authentication on the General Setup of the User Authentication web page Click Add Select an index number corresponding to the location for storing the entry from 1 to 500 Enter your name auth ID password e mail address and phone number You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the machine when you start scanning to email from the control panel Click Apply Register authorized network users 1 oO 4 5 6 T7 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and
296. roject 7 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following co
297. s You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output If your original document is light or faded press the right arrow to make the output darker Press Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Darkness Or Press Scan to Email gt the Options tab gt Darkness Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then press OK Light v Dark i CODD Erase Background You can lighten reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning colored paper or newspaper originals Press Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Erase Background Or Press Scan to Email gt the Options tab gt Erase Background Select On and press OK Scan to Edge You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is Usually the machine scans a page except edges which means the margin especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray But if you scan and sent it right away via the network as the file the machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals Press Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Scan to Edge Or Press Scan to Email gt the Options tab gt Scan to Edge Select On and press OK Quality You can use this option to produce a high quality document Higher quality you select a larger file size you get Press Scan to Server gt the Output tab gt Quality Or Press Scan to Email gt the Options tab gt Quality Best Normal O Draft Note When you set Color Mod
298. s refilled or remanufactured Samsung cannot guarantee non genuine Samsung toner cartridge s quality Service or repair required as a result of using non genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty Scanner locking switch is locked or another problem occurred Sensor failure zzz Call for service Shake xxx toner cartridge The CCD Charged Couple Device lock You can choose among Stop Continue or Mono Only as shown on the control panel If you select Stop the printer stops printing and you cannot print any more without changing the cartridge If you select Continue the printer keeps printing but the printing quality cannot be guaranteed If you select Mono Only the machine prints the data in black only Replace the toner cartridge for the best print quality when this message appears Using a cartridge beyond this stage can result in printing quality issues Page 11 4 Unlock the CCD lock has been locked The CCD does not detect its home location or move There is a problem in the sensor signal The toner supply is not enough Page 1 3 Or turn off the machine and on again Try again If the problem persists call for service Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Thoroughly roll the new cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside t
299. s Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF 3 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab 6 4 lt Faxing Optional gt 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Delay Send 5 Press On 6 Enter Job Name using the keyboard on the display select Start Time with left right arrows Ready to Far alln lob Marne Ort n Dholary Smd Fax Send Job Priority Send x Eo on Sarn live Folling Heauritit 12 Mirustesiti0 6 da 06 joe fete oa manii e pee OK Cancel e If you do not enter Job Name the machine assigns the job name as Fax Send Job xxx xxx number are set in order Note Start Time is the specific time you want the fax to be sent You can set Start Time on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than the current time For example if it is 1 00 then you can set the time starting from 1 15 If the set time is incorrect the warning message will appear and the machine resets it to the current time 7 Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory Note To cancel delaying a fax press Off before sending is activated Sending a priority fax This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of reserved operations The original is scanned into memory and immediately transmitted when the current operation is finished In addition priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between statio
300. samsung com jp AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 LATVIA 8000 7267 AUSTRIA 081 0 SAMSUNG 7267864 LITHUANIA 3 800 77777 a corn EENT ae LUXEMBURG _ 02 261 03 710 www samsung com a Cue ngeon LEDS I www samsung com MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com mx be_fr French 7864 BRAZIL 0800 124 421 www samsung com br NETHERLAND 0900 SAMSUNG 0900 www samsung com nl 4004 0000 S 7267864 0 10 min CANADA 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com ca EW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 726 www samsung com nz 7864 786 CHILE 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 NICARAGUA 00 1800 5077267 CHINA 800 810 5858 www samsung com cn latin 400 810 5858 NORWAY 3 SAMSUNG 7267864 010 6475 1880 PANAMA 800 7267 www samsung com COLOMBIA 01 8000112112 latin COSTA RICA 0 800 507 7267 PHILIPPINES 1800 10 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com ph latin 7864 CZECH 800 SAMSUNG 800 www samsung com cz 1 800 3 SAMSUNG 726 REPUBLIC 726786 7864 Samsung Zrt esk organiza n slo ka Oasis a 3 IZ Z Florenc E E 180 00 Praha 8 POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG 172678 www samsung com pl 022 607 93 33 SAMSUNG 7267864 OENMARK eae _ eee PORTUGAL _ 80820 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com pt ECUADOR 1 800 10 7267 7864 latin PUERTO RICO 1 800 682 3180 www samsung com EL SALVADOR 800 6225 latin fel REP 1 800 751 2676 www samsung com ESTONIA 800 7267 DOMINICA atin a a aoe ERE T k RUSSIA T ae KYRGYZSTAN 00 800 500 55 500 30 6227 515 EEE E SINGAPO
301. sceeceeeeeeesaeseeueuseceeeeeesesssaaauaeseeeeeeeeeeesssasaeaeseeeeeeeess 6 12 Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job ccccceccccccceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeesaeeeeceeeeeseeaeeeeeeesaeaaseeeeesseseaaeeeeeeesaaaaeess 6 12 Forwarding a received fax to Other destination ccccccccsseeeeccececeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeesaaeseeeeeessaaseeeeeeessaeneeeeeees 6 12 Forwarding a sent fax to other destination Dy a FAX eeeececcccesseeeeeeecceaeeeeeceeeesaeeeeeeeeesseaeeeeeeeesseeseseeeesesaenseeeeees 6 12 Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax oo ccceeecccceecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeseeeeeesesaaeeeeeeeesanaaeeeeees 6 12 Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by AN email cceeccccccceseeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeececeeeesseaeeeeeeesseaaneeenees 6 13 Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email ccccccseeeeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeesaneeeeeees 6 13 Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by Server cccccccccssseeeeceeeceueeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeessuaeseeeeeesesaaeeeeeeeesaaaasess 6 14 Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server ccceeeeccceeecaeeeeeeeceesaeeeseeeeeeasaaeseeeesseaeaeeeeeeesaeaasess 6 14 SS TUNG MUD TE end Ta TOMS eree EEE E RE 6 14 Setting UP reCEIVING FAXES IN COIOM ceceeeceeecceccceceeceeeseeseseececeeeeeeceaeeesesceceeeeeeesaesaessesseeeeeeeeessseceeeeesssesaaaaaeeeeeeeees 6 14 Scanning Understanding the Scan SChON ivcs
302. scunudenchccencties 6 2 BaSe CAD ice eee este demise E E E E saben E seen E E TA E 6 2 Aavan ed UA aenea a E E E E A E E E EEE 6 2 ae e E E E E E E E E E E E E tegeteeneeces 6 3 SSE EN E E E E EA E E E ene E ee ee TEA A A A ee 6 3 SEUN HS Ve OOD E E neviee pani senchnt pan nua waliae EE A E E 6 3 TIN T ecto saetce ts et ecse te pasces eae ae setae ba eeecitigs 2a bow eee eeietateseana eee aiedachenau asieiosaseasneeatoeeaneteuboeaetstanese 6 3 Sending a fax manually ON HOOK Dial ccc cccccccccsseeeseeceeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeececeeeeesessseeseesueeeeeeeeeeeessesaeaaaaeeeseeeeeess 6 4 AUtomane FESCCIING sscrersdmae a ciacouc elena estat aeeaeds soda seg sene ea ou EE Eae aaraa 6 4 Redialing the last number ccccccsssseeecececeneeeceececeesseeeeeecsaaeueeeeeesaeseeeeeeesaaeaeceesesaauseceeesseseeeessaaseeeeeessuaaseeeees 6 4 Delaying a fe ransis SION crosier ee orem aren eve corey E tee ee See ane ee ever eee ne ene 6 4 Sending a DIONYI seisine E a E EE E E ES 6 5 RECEIVE a E E E ee ee ec een eee ee eet eee 6 5 Changing the receive modes ccccccccccccsssesseeseececeeeeeeeseaeeeeecceeeeeeessseeeeeeesseceeeeeeeesseueessseeeeeeeeessessesaesaageeeseeeeeess 6 5 Receiving Manually in Telephone mode cseccccecceseeecceeeeeeecaeeeeeecaueeeeeesaaceeeeseaeeeesaaeeeesaaaueeeesauseeeessaneeesenaass 6 5 Receiving automatically in Answering Machine Fax mode ccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeesasaaeeeeeesasaanne
303. seacs 3 6 Using power saving feature 0 0 eeeeeeccecececeeeseeceeecceesseceeeeceeuseeeeeesuaeaseeeeeeeseauseceeeessaaeaeceeeesseasaaeaeeeseesseaaaeeeeeesanas 3 6 Setting the default tray and paper s nn esnsnnnnnunssenrrinnsrnnnrrnsssnnrrrrssranrrrresnnrrrresasnrrresrsnnrrrroennnrsnennrrrenennnrreeen nerne 37 Changing the default settings 2 0 00 cccsssssseccecceeceeeseceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeueeeeeeeeeesseeeeeesssceseeeeeeeessesaeaaageeeeeeeeees 3 7 Changing ihe font selling 22c22 ceces2acaccecicnt aSccaddeaaicdanssddehicectncaopedsatncdeddebesheceladactacnsdaedscaededasndzaddehegasenonsceedeubeseddadedes 3 7 Understanding the keyboard sesccscicsccsecnncdssnceccsansnnchsddseuessatescanseceaoncpiaceteecceuedcclsbaceis secabexuaibsatudsousiienteeeuedSsancdseeedvenaseies 3 8 4 Loading originals and print media HG ACI On AN Sere E ee esc E E ee cm pare tei rc ee ee sete pet Ge EE 4 1 Omin scanner OMe cece cheers spaces setoe eine cece AE E aesecessueeedeceoaeees 4 1 PUG DADE cerre sons aseacseeeceece2 s mecsaeaseeeec aseesaeiceaie dene E 4 1 CUN FINN TSO pete car cs east occa I de essere abe acces ec seers se deciee ene oe nee cuneetes ese eneomiees 4 2 SDECIHICAUON on DIN MECCA sinana n E E e E E r N i 4 3 Media sizes supported in each mode ccccssseeececccceceeeeeceecceaeuseeceececeesseeceeessauceceeeessauseceeesseaeaeeseeeesssaegeesessesaaas 4 4 Guidelines for selecting and Storing print media ccccccccceeecesseese
304. seeeeeees 6 8 Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web Service cc ceccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseceeeeeeesesseeeaesesseseeeeeeees 6 8 Using the poling OPUON seiseanan ne ee Ae mene Mem ee eter en nr ener ee ne ee eee er meee eee eee 6 9 Storno thie originals for DONNA scares cisent vaiveietetiue nA aE EARE ANE E EEEE NENE NREN 6 9 Printing Deleting the polling document cccccccseeeeeeceeeeeeecseeseeecaaeeeeeeceueeeeesauseeeeseaueeeessuaeeeesssaeeeeesneesseaages 6 9 FOU SS TORS 1 e E E E E E EE ates eueaceuactesansdeccss 6 9 Folling tom a remote Malloy atcndes erites cece cesseecetetncabeeineebeblsecehies taeietetcctendedeasheeonesioesesnecesoecentadavenivcleatetedlecettetagienentades 6 9 AA M OO ee ee ee ee mS ne eS eS eee ee ee E ee eee ee eee ee eee ee eee 6 10 RTS AUN Ns ONG se aes eee ctlteianatve caches S cielo pedeete nee nenn A E ae uetagoreeetioeenolssda E 6 10 Storing originals m MallDOX sesccssasccie coum vecceessecssaeacscasaecave deh caseicissbuiosheescaceacessuseustinederenadtbedetaeyersadendecsetcdonssaceiext 6 10 Faxing to a remote Mailbox sacccsciccesctosscssleceiececpatsnededuededsndscerasdantedetdaodeeacideacdemadseed denoedeee deen dou nbebeesedmaeniceeeeectoes 6 11 Printing a report after sending a fax cascccceenerceceaccetscerescnsdoaces cekaceceeesteaosehdendincnctd xmedsdeessatadedeotehGecetendsieassthewoubeeesee 6 11 Sending a fax iN toll SAVE tiMe ou eee ecccccceceecssseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeesaseeees
305. select general print order compare to duplex print order If this option does not appear your printer does not have this feature Darken Text Allows you to print all the text on your document darker than on a normal document eFit to Page This setting allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital document size This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document eRGB Color This setting determines how colors are rendered Standard is the most widely used setting which the color tone of this mode is the closest to that of Standard monitor SRGB Monitor Vivid mode is appropriate for printing presentation data and charts The color tone of Vivid mode produces more Vivid color images than that of Standard mode Device mode is best used for printing fine lines small characters and color drawings The color tone of Device mode may be different from that of monitor the pure toner colors are used for printing Cyan Magenta and Yellow colors Using Your Printer with a Macintosh 46 Optional Finisher aper Sore UG Letter Printer Precete Standard Copies 1 F Collated Fages al From 1 to rientation J le Primer Features 2B Two Sided ESO bey 1100 inches H Featare Ser Optlonal Finisher H Output Made Printer Setting a 1a Output Bin Printer Default MH dape None Request Oher No Offset H G Cr Supplies Cancel
306. select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back Cancel 5 The list of printers available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next Select Printer Port em Select a port that will be used for your printer TCPAP Port C Shared Printer UNC C Add TCP IP Port Advanced Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list IP Port Name NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing the installer from Update detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on this PC before continuing with the installation Installing Printer Software in Windows e If you click the Advanced button you can search a printer with the SNMP Community Name Default name is public e f you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the printer To verify your printer s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration page in machine e To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button e If you select Add TCP IP Port yo
307. skip this step and go to Installing Software for Network Printing on page 8 You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method NOTE If the Found New Hardware Wizard window appears during the installation procedure click in the upper right corner of the box to close the window or click Cancel 5 Typical Installation This is recommended for most users All components necessary for printer operations will be installed l Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start All programs Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK and type If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 3 Click Next It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select a language from the list below English v i Cancel e If
308. ss Edit or Delete Select recipient s address and click Apply Press x to return to the previous screen You can store frequently used email addresses from your computer using the SyncThru Web Service Page 7 5 e Subject Message Subject and message of the email 7 1 lt Scanning gt e Options Original Size Sets the originals to a specific fixed size Page 7 9 Original Type Selects whether the original is text or photo Page 7 9 Color Mode Adjusts the color options of the scan output If the original is color and you want to scan in color press Color Mode Page 7 9 Darkness Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output Use left right arrow to adjust the values Page 7 10 Erase Background Erases backgrounds like paper patterns Page 7 10 Scan to Edge Scans originals from edge to edge Page 7 10 Quality Adjusts the display quality of the scan output Page 7 10 File Format Selects the file format of the scan output Page 7 11 Scan Preset Automatically changes some scan options such as file format resolution and more You can adjust options to fit each specific purpose Page 7 10 Duplex Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value e Default Puts the default message i
309. stems with a built in USB interface or a 10 100 Base TX network interface card When you print a file from a Macintosh computer you can use the PostScript driver by installing the PPD file NOTE Some printers do not support a network interface Make sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide This chapter includes e Installing Software e Uninstalling software e Setting Up the Printer e Printing e Scanning Installing Software The CD ROM that came with your printer provides you with the PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple LaserWriter driver only available when you use a printer which supports the PostScript driver for printing on a Macintosh computer Also it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a Macintosh computer Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer Turn on your computer and printer Insert the CD ROM which came with your printer into the CD ROM drive Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop Double click the MAC_ Installer folder Double click the Installer OS X icon Enter the password and click OK The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is recommended for most users All components necessary for printer operations will be installed If you select Custom Install you can choose individual
310. system CCD Charge Coupled Device CCD is a hardware which enables the scan job CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets When collation is selected the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies Control Panel A control panel is a flat typically vertical area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed They are typically found in front of the machine Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing For example 5 coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5 image or text on it So if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it the coverage will be higher and at the same time a toner usage will be as much as the coverage CSV Comma Separated Values CSV A type of file format CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications The file format as it is used in Microsoft Excel has become a pseudo standard throughout the industry even among non Microsoft platforms DADF A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder DADF is a mechanism that will automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state reset or initialized DHCP
311. t ccccccsseeeeceeseeeeceseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeaeeeeseaeseeesauaeesesseaeeessaaaes 14 3 15 Specifications Ee PECCAN a E A 15 1 Primer SDCCINCANOMS sxi tecl corcncssdecaccestsicdeoceastieldsasaasncumnabaaseernctecedvectutiescverteceeManededanescesseatectenndenncdeleseddedeeeaesesceeueeusieste 15 2 Copier SCCM CANONS senere i E E E AEE EE 15 2 SCARE SOCCIIC AMONG srine Ree EE EAE E EE EEE REE NEEE S E RIESEN 15 3 Facsimile SpecificatioNs optional sssssissmsossicisnraniniedsinenennn eenei aana eiia Tese aesae eraa riai ash EAEE aiai 15 3 16 Glossary Index About this user s guide This user s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage Both novice users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below e Document is synonymous with original e Paper is synonymous with media or print media The following table offers the conventions of this guide Comenton Dessrpton mame Bold Used for texts on the screen or actual prints on the machine Note Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the machine function and feature Caution Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or malfunction Footnote Used to provide more detailed information on certai
312. t I mage to use the default image Font Text Darken Text Check this box to print all the text in your document darker than on a normal document All Text Black Check this box to print all the texts in your document in solid black regardless of the color it appears on the screen Advanced Download as Outline This option allows the driver to download any TrueType fonts that are used in your document not stored resident on your machine If after printing a document you find that the fonts did not print correctly 18 Basic Printing choose Download as Bit mage and resubmit your print job This feature is available only when you use the PCL printer driver Download as Bit I mage This option allows the driver to download the font data as bitmap images Documents with complicated fonts such as Korean or Chinese or various other fonts will print faster in this setting Download as bit image is useful when printing from Adobe programs Print as Graphics This option allows the driver to download any fonts as graphics When printing documents with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts printing performance speed may be enhanced in this setting Use Printer Fonts When Use Printer Fonts is checked the printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory resident fonts to print your document rather than downloading the fonts used in your document Because downloading fonts takes time selecting
313. t checked and an overlay has been selected the overlay automatically prints with your document 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window The selected overlay prints on your document NOTE The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay Deleting a Page Overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use l Inthe printer properties window click the Advanced tab 2 Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list 3 Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box 4 Click Delete i When a confirming message window appears click Yes 6 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 4 Using Windows PostScript Driver If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your system CD ROM to print a document PPDs in combination with the PostScript driver access printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the Supplied software CD ROM This chapter includes Printer Settings You can use the printer properties window which allows you to access all of the printer options you need when using your printer When the printer properties are displayed you can review and change the settings needed for your print job Your printer properties window may differ depending on your operating system This Software User s Guide shows the Pro
314. t job was too complex You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory A PostScript error page prints The print job may not be PostScript Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job Check to see whether the software application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine The optional tray is not selected in the driver The printer driver has not been configured to recognize the optional tray Open the PostScript driver properties select the Device Settings tab and set the Tray option of the Installable Options section to Installed Window Macintosh The machine does not staple correctly when printing more than one copy from Acrobat Reader with a collate option The machine does not staple correctly when printing more than one copy with a collate option Try to print with the latest Adobe Reader program or print with turning on Print as Image option from Acrobat printing options It might take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image Turning off collation options on applications including CUPS pstops collation option may solve this problem If you want to use the collation option go to printer driver s advanced option and turn the collation on Common Linux problems Possible Cause and Solution The machine does not print The CUPS Common UNIX Printing System version distributed with SuSE Linux
315. t material such as transparencies postcards note cards and envelopes It is useful for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper Tips on using the multi purpose tray Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi purpose tray To prevent paper jams do not add paper when there is still paper in the multi purpose tray This also applies to other types of print media Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into the multi purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Page 4 2 Flatten any curl on postcards envelopes and labels before loading them into the multi purpose tray To load paper in the multi purpose tray 1 Open the multi purpose tray and unfold the multi purpose tray extension as shown 2 Ifyou are using paper flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading For transparencies hold them by the edges and avoid touching the print side Oils from your fingers can cause print quality problems Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down e When using a transparency avoid using transparency without Stripe band or with stripe band on the longer side of the paper It might cause a paper feeding jam O X e Place the side to be printed facing down
316. t settings in the Image tab Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab Press On Hook Dial on the control panel O a A OQO Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel If the number is which you have dialed recently press the Redial Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers and select a fax number 7 Press Start when you hear a high pitched fax signal from the remote fax machine Automatic resending When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer the machine automatically redials the number To change the time interval between redials and or the number of redial attempts refer to the next following steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Page 3 6 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press Redial 5 Select Redial Term and Redial Times CP Ready Ji fieady General 6 Press OK Redialing the last number 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab 3 Place the originals face up into the DADF 4 Press the Redial Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers 5 Select a fax number in the list and press OK The machine automatically begins to send Delaying a fax transmission You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present 1 Pres
317. t tilt or turn over the container 6 Take a new waste toner container out of its package 7 Insert the new container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place 8 Close the front cover then the side cover 9 Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on Caution v If the cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate 11 8 lt Maintenance gt Maintenance Parts To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the life span of each item has expired OO e o ee Transfer belt unit Cartridge transfer ME 100 000 images Transfer roller MEA unit TR 2 Approx 100 000 T2 pages Fuser unit ELA unit fuser Approx 100 000 pages DADF rubber pad RMO ADF rubber Approx 50 000 pages DADF feed roller MEA ADF roller Approx 200 000 pages Multi purpose tray MEA unit holder pad Approx 50 000 rubber pad pages Guide exit duplex MEA unit_exit duplex Approx 100 000 pages Paper feed roller MEA unit roller PU Approx 100 000 pages MP Pickup roller ELA HOU MP pickup Approx 200 000 pages Side cover grill DUPLEX cover filter Approx 100 000 pages We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized service provider dealer or the retailer where you boug
318. tall the imaging unit If it is already installed try to reinstall the imaging unit If the problem persists please call for service Replace a imaging unit with a Samsung genuine imaging unit Page 11 6 lt Troubleshooting gt xxx toner cartridge is not compatible Check useris guide xxx toner cartridge is not installed Install it DC motor does not operate zzz Please turn off then on Did not supply enough xxx toner Remove seal tape amp reinstall Did not supply enough xxx toner Please open close door End of life Replace with new xxx imaging unit End of life Replace with new xxx toner cartridge Fax memory is almost full Print or remove received fax Job Fax memory is full Print or remove received fax Job The toner cartridge you have installed is not for your machine The toner cartridge is not installed or the CRUM Consumer Replaceable Unit Monitor in the cartridge is not properly connected There is a problem in the control of DC motor unit Not supplied toner to the imaging unit The machine received several papers with many images and it cannot supply the toner properly The imaging unit has reached its life span A toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge life The printer stops printing There is no more available fax memory No more fax data can be received Available fax memory is now 1MB
319. ted 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence vi 1 introduction Thank you for purchasing this Samsung multifunctional product Your machine provides printing copying scanning and faxing functions This chapter includes e Special features e Machine overview e Control panel overview Introduc
320. ted computer which is called host computer on the network The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help NOTE e Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide e If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM Sharing the Printer Locally 28 Setting Up a Host Computer Start Windows From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes Double click your printer driver icon From the Printer menu select Sharing Check the Share this printer box Fill in the Shared Name field and then click OK avAWN Setting Up a Client Computer l Right click the Windows Start button and select Explore 2 Select My Network Places and then right click Search for Computers 3 Fillin the IP address of host computer in Computer name field and click Search In case host computer requires User name and Password fill in User ID and password of host computer account Double click Printers and Faxes Right click printer driver icon select Connect Click Yes if the installation confirm message appears oul amp Scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files on your computer Then you can fax or e mail the files display them on your
321. termark Message box You can enter up to 256 characters The message displays in the preview window When the First Page Only box is checked the watermark prints on the first page only 4 Select watermark options You can select the font name style size and shade from the Font Attributes section as well as set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section 5 Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermaks list 6 When you have finished editing click OK or Print until you exit the Print window To stop printing the watermark select None from the Watermark drop down list Advanced Printing 24 Editing a Watermark l To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 2 From the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears 3 Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermaks list and change the watermark message and options 4 Click Update to save the changes 5 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Deleting a Watermark l To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 2 From the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears 3 Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermaks list
322. test page select the check box and click Next b If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If it doesn t click No to reprint it 6 When the reinstallation is done click Finish 12 Installing Printer Software in Windows Installing mono printer driver This printer provides you the printer drivers with a mono driver SO you Can use your printer as a monochrome printer You must install the mono driver on your computer Following steps guide you through the step by step installation process l Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on Or your computer and printer are connected to the network 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears 3 Click Cancel It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select a language from the list below English X Cancel If the confirmation window appears click Finish Click Start gt Printers and Faxes Select Add Printer When Add Printer Wizard appears click Next YOU A Select Local printer attached to this computer and Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer then click Next Go to step 13 If your computer does not find the printer then follow the next step 8 Select Next in the Select a Printer Port window 9 inthe Select a Printer Port window select Have Disk 1
323. that the hard disk space of the computer is not enough to access the print job The paper option that was selected in the printer properties may be incorrect The job may be very complex If possible attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job You can also try using a different printer cable Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port If the computer has more than one port make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one Check the printer properties to ensure that all of the print settings are correct Repair the printer software See Software section Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error Contact a service representative Get more hard disk space and print the document again For many software applications the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the printer properties Select the correct paper source See the printer driver help screen Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings lt Troubleshooting gt Half the page is blank The machine prints but the text is wrong garbled or incomplete Pages print but they are blank The page orientation setting may be incorrect The paper size and the paper size settings do not match The printer ca
324. the Basic tab choose Booklet Printing from the Type drop down list 3 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type NOTE The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes In order to find out the available paper size for this feature select the available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab If you select an unavailable paper size this option can be automatically canceled Select only available paper paper without i or mark 4 Click OK and print the document 5 After printing fold and staple the pages Printing on Both Sides of Paper You can print on both sides of a paper duplex Before printing decide how you want your document oriented You can only use this feature with Letter Legal A4 US Folio or Oficio sized paper The options are e Printer Setting if you select this option this feature is determined by the setting you ve made on the control panel of the printer e None e Long Edge which is the conventional layout used in book binding e Short Edge which is the type often used with calendars N MI wo UNIN ool TTT p il A Long Edge A Short Edge e Reverse Duplex Printing allows you to select general print order compare to duplex print order NOTE Do not print on both sides of labels transparencies envelopes or thick paper Paper jamming and damage to the printer may result
325. the control of LSU unit There is a problem in the control of motor unit The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the scan sensor within the correct time after actuating the registration sensor Oversized document or double feeding of originals The originals are jammed in DADF Suggested solutions Close the finisher until it locks into place Turn the machine off and reinstall the finisher again Check that the finisher cable is connected properly If the problem persists please call for service Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Install the fuser unit Call for service Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Open the DADF cover and remove jammed original Page 12 1 Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed original Page 12 1 Check the document size whether it is supported Page 15 1 Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed original Page 12 1 12 12 lt Troubleshooting gt Message Original paper jam in front of scanner duplex path Paper has jammed during duplex printing in the DADF Original paper jam inside of scanner The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the gate sensor within the correct time after act
326. tion Printing than the paper loaded in the tray the machine environment can reduce the size of the original to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine If this feature is set to Off the machine cannot reduce the original to fit onto one page The original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or more pages If you set this option to On and set the discard size to 10 mm and the received data is longer then the currently set paper in the tray the machine minuses the specified segment set as the discard size ee rr ae Machine ID amp Enter the machine ID name and fax number Fax No which will be printed at the top of each page Receive Start This feature works best when you are using an Code extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without going to the fax machine Page 6 6 e You can set the machine to print out the fax on both sides of the paper or stapled Page 6 6 Error Correction It helps with poor line quality and makes sure Redial The machine can automatically redial a remote Mode any faxes you send are properly transmitted to fax machine if it was busy You can set the any other ECM equipped fax machines number of redial attempts and an interval Sending a fax using ECM may take more time between attempts Selecting 0 for Redial Times means that the machine will not use this
327. tions using the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them is allowed to gain control over the device at a time The other consumer will encounter a device busy response This usually happens while starting the scan procedure and an appropriate message box appears To identify the source of the problem you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner The port symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied with some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or you should press the Release port button if you are sure that the port owner is not functioning properly Possible Cause and Solution The machine does not scan cannot scan via Gimp Front end encounter error Cannot open port device file when printing a document e Check if a document is loaded into the machine Check if your machine is connected to the computer Make sure it is connected properly if an I O error is reported while scanning Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same O interface port the situation of simultane
328. to Color This item allows you to automatically adjust color Tone tone for the best possible color print quality Adjustment e Color Tone Adjustment Activation Activates color tone adjustment Press On to activate this feature If this option is On the machine will regularly and automatically adjust color tone Setting Color Standard Sets the standard for adjusting color tone You need to set this option at least once when you purchase the machine This option will reduce the color difference between machines by setting a color standard Page 3 1 Color Tone Adjustment Adjusts the color tone This option uses the color standard you set in Setting Color Standard and applies to the machine Note You need to set Setting Color Standard option before using Color Tone Adjustment option Calibrating ID Sensor Automatically calculates the reduced or worn out supplies like toner or machine parts and uses this information to adjust the color tone For example if the yellow toner is running out the machine calculates the amount of remaining yellow toner and adjusts color tone so the printouts are fine Manual Color This item allows you to quickly adjust color tone You Tone can easily adjust the color tone and see the result Adjustment right away but it s not a permenant adjustment Use this item to get a quick result Note If Color Tone Adjustment Activation is set to Off you need to use Manual Color Tone Adjustment everytime yo
329. to see how your options affect the picture 6 Click Next J Enter a picture name and select a file format and destination to save the picture 8 Your picture has been successfully copied to your 9 1 uh WU N computer Choose one of the options on screen Click Next O Click Finish Scanning 31 Windows 2008 Vista l Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound Scanners and Cameras 3 Double click Scan a document or picture Windows Fax and Scan appears NOTE e To view scanners user can click on View scanners and cameras e If there is no Scan a document or picture open the MS paint program and click From Scanner or Camera on File menu 4 Click New Scan Scan driver appears 5 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture 6 Click Scan NOTE If you want to cancel the scan job press the Cancel button on the Scanner and Camera Wizard Windows 7 l Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers 3 Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes Start Scan New Scan application appears 4 Choose your scanning pref
330. tributing the toner Page 11 4 A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting the error to be cleared Check the display message When the problem is cleared the machine resumes Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge a Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO IEC 19798 See General specifications The number of pages may be affected by operating environment printing interval media type and media size Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when End of life Replace with new xxx toner cartridge appears and the printer stops printing Note Check the message on the display screen and follow the instruction on the message or refer to Troubleshooting part Page 12 1 If the problem persists call for service lt Introduction gt Menu map Admin Setting Tray Management Usage Page Report The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the General tab Page 10 2 Tray Supplies Life machine or use the machine s functions These menus can be accessed een ee ro ee by pressing Machine Setup Job Status or touching menus on the Page 10 10 Tray3 display screen Refer to the following diagram Main screen The Main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel Some menus are grayed out depending on your model Copy Fax Optional
331. tware section Save time and money e You can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper to save paper e You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper See Software section e This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use 1 NO AD er AEN Ne Expand your machine s capacity e Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their memory Page 14 1 e A network interface enables network printing Your machine comes with a built in network interface 10 100 1000 Base TX e Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3 Emulation PS enables PS printing Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3 e Copyright 1995 2005 Zoran Corporation All rights reserved Zoran the Zoran logo IPS PS3 and Onelmage are trademarks of Zoran Corporation 136 PS3 fonts Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc Print in various environments A e You can print with various operating system such as Windows Linux and Macintosh systems e Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a network interface Copy originals in several formats e You can create a booklet using sequential 2 sided document production e There are special functions to erase punch holes staple marks and newspaper background e The print quality and image size may be adjusted and enhance at the same time
332. u 3 The Print window will be displayed It may look slightly different depending on your application 4 Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window 5 Click Print or OK 6 Enter the recipients numbers and select the option Fax Options Fax Machine Model IP Address or Name 10 88 188 153 Phonebook Recipients Name Fax Number Fax number SFfice Outlook Address Boot Fax Quality Standard OFine Cover Page _ Use cover page To Subject Message Notify me on delivery If you want to use a cover page check Use cover page 6 1 lt Faxing Optional gt Check Notify me on delivery when the fax delivered to the recipients successfully 7 Click Send Note For more information about Samsung Network PC Fax click Help Checking a sent fax list You can check a sent fax list on your computer From the Start menu click Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Network PC Fax gt Fax Journal Then the Fax Journal appears with the fax list you have sent Understanding the Fax screen To use the fax feature press Fax on the Main screen If the screen displays an other menu press f to go to the Main screen Scan bo Email Scan to Server Toner nbo _ Note If the optional fax feature is not installed the fax icon will not appear on the Main screen Basic tab Fax No S19886187 e F
333. u can enter Pv4 IPv6 or the Hostname NoTE If you cannot find your machine in network please turn off the firewall and click Update For Windows operating system click Start Control Panel and start windows firewall and set this option unactivated For other operating system refer to its on line guide 6 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung If you so desire select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership Wes I d like to register i I I dlike to print a test page NOTE After setup is complete if your printer driver doesn t work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software on page 11 Custom Installation You can choose individual components to install and set a Specific IP address 9 l Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on For details about connecting to the network see the supplied printer s User s Guide 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically ru
334. u need to adjust the color tone 10 9 lt Machine status and advanced setup gt 3 Press the Print Report tab Document Box Management i You can set a person performing deletion of the public boxes in Public 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel Print Configation ao 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter eei password and press OK Report ENR 3 Press the Setup tab gt Document Box Management PEL Fom Lit rome i General Prini Reporti a eee eee ee You can print Network Configuration PS3 Font List PCL Font List and Schedule Jobs Report Schedule Jobs Report shows the job list in pending in waiting in delayed faxing or the Mailbox list as well Accounting Supplies You can print the amount of each Reports Information category that your machine has OPTION DESCRIPTION printed so far Public Box If you set this option to Administrators only only Network Auth It displays user login IDs and emails Deletion the administrator can delete the publicly stored Log Report boxes in Public because the machine will asks l the password of administrator Usage Page You can print the report on the Report amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type Accounting Prints the report of printing out count Printing a report Reports for each login user This is used only when network authentication in You can print a report on the machine s configuration
335. uality for your Specific printing needs Click the Graphic tab to display the options shown below See Printing a Document on page 14 for more information on accessing printer properties amp Printing Preferences PIK Basic_ Paper Graphics Advanced I Samsung Color Mode Letter Omm On 8 50 x 11 00 inches inch LA O Grayscale ah Font Text Darken Text 1 all Text Black Raster Compression Level Auto h Graphic Controller Fine Edge Normal vi Color Mode You can choose color options Setting to Color typically produces the best possible print quality for color documents If you want to print a color document in grayscale select Grayscale If you want to adjust the color options manually click Advanced button e Advanced You can adjust the color options manually Levels You can manually adjust the level of color settings like brightness contrast and more Matching You can choose the color mode among Default Settings ICM Setting and RGB Color You can import the color file you created with Samsung Easy Color Manager to the printer driver For more information go to http solution samsungprinter com personal colormanager NOTE e If you click the Reset button settings in the Advanced option returns to the default setting e If you click the Import I mage button you can use the image you want to use for adjusting color settings Click Defaul
336. ually using an extension telephone This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without going to the fax machine When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones press the keys 9 onthe extension phone The machine receives the fax Press the buttons slowly in sequence If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine try pressing 9 once again To change the 9 to for example 3 follow the next steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Page 3 6 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Receive Start Code 4 Select On 5 Press left right arrows to display number 3 Reserve Start Code 6 Press OK Receiving in secure receiving mode You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended In secure receiving mode all incoming faxes go into memory 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Page 3 6 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Secure Receive 4 Select On 5 Enter Passcode with 4 digit
337. uating the scan sensor When the machine is on jammed paper is detected in the DADF Original paper jam while reversing paper in scanner The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the duplex sensor within the correct time when the document was fed the wrong way Paper jam at exit Paper jammedinthe Pull jammed paper of finisher stacker exit part from the stacker exit Paper Jam at the bottom of duplex path Paper has jammed during duplex printing Paper Jam at the Paper has jammed top of duplex path during duplex printing Paper Jam in exit Paper has jammed area in the fuser area Paper jam infront Paper jammed in the of finisher stacker Paper Jamin MP Paper misfed from tray multi purpose tray Paper Jam in tray 1 Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray Paper Jam in tray 2 Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray Paper Jam in tray 2 HCF Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray Meaning Suggested solutions Clear the jam Page 12 2 Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed original Page 12 1 Lift up the document input traz and remove the jammed original Page 12 1 Clear the jam Page 12 9 Clear the jam Page 12 9 Clear the jam Page 12 8 Open the stacker door and remove jammed paper by lowering guide 1a or 1b Clear the jam Page 12 7 Clear the jam Page 12 3 and page 12 5
338. umid conditions may cause some paper to stick together Multiple sheets of Different types of paper may be stacked in the paper do not tray Load paper of only one type size and feed weight If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam clear the paper jam Page 12 3 Paper does not Remove any obstructions from inside the feed into the machine machine Paper has not been loaded correctly Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray The paper is too thick Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine Page 4 3 If an original does not feed into the machine the DADF rubber pad may require to be replaced Contact a service representative 12 15 lt Troubleshooting gt Suggested solutions There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray If you are printing The paper keeps jamming on special materials use the multi purpose tray An incorrect type of paper is being used Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine Page 4 3 There may be debris inside the machine Open the front cover and remove the debris If an original does not feed into the machine the DADF rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative Transparencies stick together in the paper exit Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly Printing problems
339. ure that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA compliant scanner lt Glossary gt INDEX A admin setting 10 1 altitude adjustment 10 3 answering machine fax 6 5 authentication network accounting 10 7 printing areport 10 2 10 10 setting up 3 6 10 2 auto center 5 10 B Book copy 5 7 C CCD Lock 1 3 cleaning inside 11 2 outside 11 2 scan unit 11 2 Clear 1 5 Clear All 1 5 Clone copy 5 7 collated 5 4 color mode faxing 6 7 scanning 7 9 9 4 control panel 1 3 1 5 copy copying 5 2 covers 5 8 duplex copy 5 3 erasing background 5 10 erasing edge 5 9 ID stamp 10 4 making a booklet 5 7 page number 10 4 poster 5 6 reduce enlarge 5 3 shifting margin 5 10 solving copy problems 12 20 the size of the originals 5 3 time amp date 10 4 transparencies 5 8 copy setup 10 4 country setup 10 5 D DADF cover 1 3 input tray 1 3 output tray 1 3 width guides 1 3 darkness copying 5 5 faxing 6 7 scanning 7 10 9 4 date amp time 3 6 10 2 printing date amp time in copied out 10 2 10 4 default settings 3 7 altitude adjustment 10 3 changing the default settings 3 7 energy saver 10 3 language 10 3 loading paper 3 7 machine test 10 3 measurements 10 2 output option 10 3 setting a fax header 6 3 sound 10 3 supplies management 10 3 system timeout 10 2 tray management 10 3 tray setting 3 7 display sc
340. utting in the margin value or Auto If you set this option to Auto the machine senses and determines the size of the original Press Scan to Server gt the Advanced tab gt Original Size Or Press Scan to Email gt the Options tab gt Original Size Use up down arrows to go to the next screen Select the appropriate option and press OK osais Original Type You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a document being scanned Press Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Original Type Or Press Scan to Email gt the Options tab gt Original Type Select the appropriate option and press OK Taxi e Text For originals that have text or line art e Text Photo For originals that have both text and photographs together e Photo For originals that are continuous tone photographs Color Mode Use this option to scan the original in Mono Gray or Color mode Press Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Color Mode lt Scanning gt Or Press Scan to Email gt the Options tab gt Color Mode Or Press Scan to PC gt the Image tab gt Color Mode Select the appropriate option and press OK Color Gray ER mono e Color Uses color to display an image 24 bits per pixel 8 bits for each RGB is used for 1 pixel e Gray Uses the black gradation to display an image 8 bits per pixel e Mono Displays an image in black and white 1 bit per pixel Darknes
341. ver Press Next to proceed with uninstalling the driver Press Cancel to leave the driver intact Go Coe 5 Click Finish for MFP device only Using the Unified Driver Configurator Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring Printer or MFP devices Since an MFP device combines the printer and scanner the Unified Linux Driver Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and scanner functions There is also a special MFP port option responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and scanner via a single I O channel After installing the Unified Linux driver the Unified Linux Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop Opening the Unified Driver Configurator l Double click Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified Driver and then Unified Driver Configurator 2 Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the corresponding configuration window Unified Driver Configurator po Printers configuration KE Printers Configuration button Prins attic P Refresh Scanners Configuration button we diner LJ Remove Printer Ports Configuration button oC Setas Defaut ae ten Test Properties About Help m Selected printer Loca
342. ver an existing document For details see Using Watermarks on page 24 Overlay Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and letterhead paper For details see Using Overlays on page 25 Output Options e Print Order This options allows you to set the sequence in which the pages will print Select the print order from the drop down list Normal This option allows you to print all pages from the first page to the last page Reverse All Pages This option allows you to print all pages from the last page to the first page Print Odd Pages This option allows you to print only the odd numbered pages of the document Print Even Pages This option allows you to print only the even numbered pages of the document Staple This option staples the print outs Request Offset If you don t want the printout sets to be in one stack the machine places printout sets slightly offset from one another Output Mode This option allows you to choose the way printouts are to be arranged NOTE You need to install an optional finisher such as 2 Bin Finisher or 4 Bin Mailbox Basic Printing 19 e Advanced This option allows you to set advanced output options for printing such as printing an information page and saving as a form to later use as an overlay NOTE f you click the Reset button settings in the Advanced option returns to the default setting Job Settings This option allows
343. veral network IPs at the same time The following procedure is based on windows XP Note e You can only use SetIP program when your machine is connected to a network e You can only use IPv4 setting for Set IP e If you are in a non static IP address environment and need to setup a DHCP network protocol go to the http developer apple com networking bonjour download select the program Bonjour for Windows due to your computer operating system and install the program This program will allow you to fix the network parameter automatically Follow the instruction in the installation window This Bonjour program does not support Linux Installing the program 1 3 4 5 6 Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine When the driver CD runs automatically close the window Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive X represents your CD ROM drive Double click Application gt SetIP Double click Setup exe to install this program Select the language Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation Starting the program 7 8 From the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Samsung Printers gt SetIP gt SetIP Select the name of your printer and click zs 3 4 lt Getting Started gt Note If you cannot find your printer name click to refresh the list 9 Enter the network interface s MAC address IP address subnet mask default gateway and then click
344. when you entered a new file name the file will be saved as a different file name that is automatically programmed e Overwrite lf the USB memory already has the same file name when you entered a new file name the previous file will be recorded over with the new file 9 5 lt Using USB flash memory gt Printing from a USB memory device You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device You can print TIFF BMP JPEG PDF and PRN files Direct Print option supported file types e PRN Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible e PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when you print a document The document will be saved as a PRN file rather than printed on paper Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed directly from USB memory See Software section to learn how to create a PRN file e BMP BMP Uncompressed TIFF TIFF 6 0 Baseline e JPEG JPEG Baseline e PDF PDF 1 4 and below If your USB memory device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide To print a document from a USB memory device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory porton
345. with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user s guide ADF An Automatic Document Feeder ADF is a mechanism that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple Inc for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors As the number of bits increases the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map 1 bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem GDI and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client BOOTP enables diskless workstation computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating
346. x Passcode by pressing options Page 6 10 Note If you set the Notification option to On you are notified when a fax is received in Mailbox Page 6 10 Output Tray This feature lets you select the paper tray to use for receiving a fax Toll Save Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save time for saving Page 6 12 Send Batch The machine asks you whether you want to add the documents to the reserved delay fax if the fax number you have dialed is same as the delay fax number Page 6 12 Fax Forward You can forward a sent or received fax to other Settings destination by a fax or an email Page 6 12 Fax Ending This setting selects whether the end fax tone is Sound on or off Page 6 14 Rx Color This function allows you to recieve faxes in Printing color Page 6 14 Caller ID If you have set this option the machine remembers the last twenty fax numbers Network Setup You may set up the network with the machine s touch screen Before doing that you must have the information concerning the type of network protocols and computer system you use If you are not sure which setting to use contact your network administrator to configure this machine network 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Network Setup gt Ready Atleast one condition should be selected as ON General Print Report
347. y gt Darkness and adjust the brightness amp darkness 6 Press OK Changing the font setting Your machine has preset the font for your region or country If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition such as the DOS environment you can change the font setting as follows 1 Ensure that you have installed the printer driver from the provided software CD 2 Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar or Notification Area in Linux You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X 3 Click Printer Setting If your machine is connected to a network SyncThru Web Service screen appears automatically Click Machine Settings Click PCL Select your preferred font in the Symbol set list N O A A Click Apply Note Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding languages e Russian CP866 ISO 8859 5 Latin Cyrillic e Hebrew Hebrew 15Q Hebrew 8 Hebrew 7 Israel only e Greek ISO 8859 7 Latin Greek PC 8 Latin Greek e Arabic amp Farsi HP Arabic 8 Windows Arabic Code Page 864 Farsi ISO 8859 6 Latin Arabic 3 7 lt Getting Started gt e OCR OCR A OCR B Understanding the keyboard You can enter alphabet characters numbers or special symbols using the keyboard on the touch screen This keyboard is specially arranged like a normal keyboard for better usability for the user Touch the input area where you need to enter
348. y and Edit to change the settings for paper type and size Note Depending on the optional kit you installed or the category you selected the selectable options on the display screen may differ Usage Counters You can view the amount of each category that your machine has printed so far To print this report see page 10 10 Measurements This option lets you change the measurement unit to use mm or inch and set the numeric General settings separation comma or period Before you get ready to using the machine it is recommended to set up Timers the machine parameters The machine cancels a printing job if data does not be received in specific time e System Timeout The machine returns to the default value after certain time the machine waits You can set a time for maximum 10 minutes e Held Job Timeout The machine holds a job for a specific time period You can set a time period for at least an hour 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Factory setting is 1111 10 2 lt Machine status and advanced setup gt ee A Language It allows you to change the language that appears on the touch screen Power Saver Tray Management Altitude Adjustment Output Options You can reduce energy consumption by setting these features Power Saver has two options first Low Power Save turns off the

samsung CLX-8540ND Series Multi Functional Printer user manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents